Canon Printer C3500 User Manual
MultiPASS C3500  
USER  
MANUAL  
Canon  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USERS IN U.S.A.  
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON  
FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See Appendix A for the unit’s  
dimensions and weight.  
B. Order Information  
1. Only a single line, touch-tone or rotary telephone set is to be used.  
2. Order an RJ11-C modular jack (USOC code), which should be  
installed by the phone company. If the RJ11-C jack is not present,  
installation cannot occur.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business  
representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or  
equivalent. Use one line per unit.  
DDD (DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE  
or  
IDDD (INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE IF YOU  
COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards [e.g., the  
2500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones]. A dedicated extension  
off a PBX unit without “Call Waiting” can be used with your MultiPASS C3500.  
Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non-standard  
signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause  
a fax error.  
N
C. Power Requirements  
This equipment should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire  
grounded outlet only. Do not connect this unit to an outlet or power line  
shared with other appliances that cause “electrical noise.” Air conditioners,  
electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort generate noise which  
often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and  
receiving of documents.  
CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the rear panel of  
this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC  
Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this  
equipment. If requested, this information must be given to the telephone  
company. This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the  
telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT MALFUNCTION  
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures  
described in this User’s Manual, disconnect the equipment from the telephone  
line or unplug the power cord. The telephone line should not be reconnected or  
the power cord plugged in until the problem is completely resolved. Users  
should contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities for servicing of equipment.  
Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by  
calling the Canon Computer Systems Customer Care Center. (See page 1-4 for  
details.)  
RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY  
Should the equipment cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone  
company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company also  
retains the right to make changes in facilities and services which may affect the  
operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the telephone  
company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user.  
WARNING  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise  
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you  
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed, and used in accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
N
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the  
following measures:  
●
●
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
●
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a  
telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the  
top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission,  
the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity,  
or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the  
sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.  
To automatically enter this information into your MultiPASS C3500, follow the  
instructions in your Quick Start Guide.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USERS IN CANADA  
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON  
FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See Appendix A for the unit’s  
dimensions and weight.  
B. Order Information  
1. Provide only a single-line to touch-tone or rotary telephone set  
terminated with a standard 4-pin modular phone plug. (Touch-tone is  
recommended if available in your area.)  
2. Order an RJ11-C modular jack (USOC code), which should be  
installed by the phone company. If the RJ11-C jack is not present,  
installation cannot occur.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business  
representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or  
equivalent. Use one line per unit.  
DDD (DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE  
or  
IDDD (INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE IF YOU  
COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards [e.g., the  
2500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones]. A dedicated extension  
off a PBX unit without “Camp On” signals is also permissible with your  
MultiPASS C3500. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they  
send non-standard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special  
codes, which may cause a fax error.  
N
C. Power Requirements  
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or  
Duplex). It should be independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners,  
or any electric equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated  
value is 120 volts and 15 amperes. The RJ11-C modular jack should be  
relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.  
NOTICE  
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification  
means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective,  
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal  
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not  
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be  
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The  
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may  
not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative  
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this  
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications  
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground  
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water  
pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be  
particularly important in rural areas.  
CAUTION  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should  
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as  
appropriate.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device  
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be  
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist  
of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of  
the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.  
CANON CANADA INC.  
1-800-263-1121  
24 HOURS A DAY, 7 DAYS A WEEK  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Your Documentation  
The following documentation is supplied with the MultiPASS C3500 to  
help you use your new Canon multi-talented color printer.  
Quick Start Guide  
This booklet describes how you unpack, set up, and start using your  
MultiPASS C3500. It includes how to install the software that comes  
with the MultiPASS C3500, including the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
for Windows®, ScanGear for MultiPASS, and the MultiPASS Printer  
Driver. This software enables you to use all the features of the MultiPASS  
C3500—color printing, PC faxing, and scanning.  
User’s Manual  
This manual offers detailed information on how to operate your  
MultiPASS C3500. It includes how to use the MultiPASS C3500 as a  
monochrome or color printer, stand-alone plain paper fax, PC fax,  
scanner, and copier. It also includes maintenance, troubleshooting, and  
specifications.  
Conventions  
This User’s Manual uses the following conventions to alert you to  
information that will help you operate the MultiPASS C3500 correctly  
and safely.  
Notes provide advice or suggestions regarding the use of the  
MultiPASS C3500.  
N
C
Cautions alert you to operations that could cause damage to your  
hardware or software, or cause injury to yourself.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Distinctive typefaces identify the buttons you press, the lights on the  
operator panel, and any commands you enter at your computer.  
❍ The buttons you press appear in this typeface: START/COPY.  
❍ The names of lights you see appear in this typeface: ALARM.  
❍ What you see in the LCD display appears in this typeface:  
REGISTRATION.  
❍ When you type something on your computer, it appears in this  
typeface: DIR/P.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
1
Introduction  
Supplies and Accessories...................................................................................... 1-2  
BJ Cartridges and BJ Tanks........................................................................... 1-2  
Canon Specialty Papers................................................................................. 1-3  
Getting Help From Canon .................................................................................. 1-4  
Servicing the MultiPASS C3500 .................................................................. 1-5  
Important Safety Instructions............................................................................. 1-5  
Main Components of the MultiPASS C3500 ..................................................... 1-7  
Front View .................................................................................................... 1-7  
Back View ...................................................................................................... 1-8  
Inside the Printer Area ................................................................................. 1-8  
Using the Operator Panel ................................................................................... 1-9  
Special Function Buttons.............................................................................. 1-11  
Loading Paper in the Sheet Feeder ..................................................................... 1-12  
Preparing Documents for Faxing, Copying, or Scanning ................................ 1-13  
Loading the Document ................................................................................ 1-14  
Adding Pages to the Document ................................................................... 1-16  
Setting the Document Feed Lever ............................................................... 1-16  
Identifying Your Documents ............................................................................... 1-17  
Copying Documents............................................................................................ 1-18  
Miscellaneous ...................................................................................................... 1-20  
If the Power Goes Out ................................................................................. 1-20  
Using Switch Boxes ....................................................................................... 1-20  
2
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Paper Handling ................................................................................................... 2-2  
Selecting Paper ............................................................................................. 2-2  
Paper Guidelines ........................................................................................... 2-4  
Installing a Printer Driver ................................................................................... 2-5  
Printing a Document .......................................................................................... 2-5  
Printer Setup Within Windows .......................................................................... 2-7  
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box in Windows 98/95 ................ 2-7  
Using the Printer Driver in Windows 98/95 ............................................... 2-7  
Using the Windows Tabs .............................................................................. 2-8  
Specifying Your Printing Options ............................................................... 2-10  
Recommended Graphics Settings ................................................................ 2-11  
Using the Setup Analyzer ............................................................................. 2-12  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Speed Versus Color ............................................................................... 2-13  
For Quick Color Printing ............................................................................ 2-13  
For High Quality Color Printing ................................................................. 2-13  
For Monochrome Printing .......................................................................... 2-14  
Other Ways to Improve Print Speed in Windows ...................................... 2-14  
Setting the Paper Thickness Lever ..................................................................... 2-16  
Printer Settings for Various Print Media ........................................................... 2-18  
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................... 2-19  
Automatically Feeding Paper ....................................................................... 2-19  
Auto Feed Guidelines ................................................................................... 2-21  
Manually Feeding Paper .............................................................................. 2-23  
Printing On Envelopes ........................................................................................ 2-25  
Using Canon’s Specialty Papers .......................................................................... 2-28  
Specialty Paper Guidelines ........................................................................... 2-28  
Canon’s High Resolution Paper HR-101 .................................................... 2-30  
Fabric Sheet FS-101 ...................................................................................... 2-33  
Printing On Banner Paper .................................................................................. 2-36  
3
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Starting the MultiPASS Desktop Manager ......................................................... 3-2  
Exploring the MultiPASS Desktop Manager Window ...................................... 3-3  
Using the Desktop Manager Folders .................................................................. 3-6  
System-defined Folders ................................................................................ 3-6  
User-defined Folders .................................................................................... 3-7  
Viewing Documents in the Desktop Manager .................................................. 3-9  
Document View ............................................................................................ 3-9  
List View ........................................................................................................ 3-10  
Setting Up the Address Book .............................................................................. 3-12  
Opening the Address Book .......................................................................... 3-12  
Working With Address Book Entries .......................................................... 3-13  
Sorting the Address Book ............................................................................ 3-13  
Adding and Editing an Individual Address ................................................ 3-14  
Adding and Editing a Group Address ......................................................... 3-16  
Printing the Address Book ........................................................................... 3-17  
Importing an Address Book ........................................................................ 3-18  
Exporting the Address Book ........................................................................ 3-19  
4
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Sending a Document .......................................................................................... 4-2  
Regular Dialing ............................................................................................. 4-2  
Automatic Dialing ........................................................................................ 4-4  
Sending a Document Using Group Dialing ............................................... 4-6  
Redialing ....................................................................................................... 4-7  
Resending a Fax After an Error ................................................................... 4-8  
Manual Sending ............................................................................................ 4-9  
Cancel Sending ............................................................................................. 4-10  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Document to More Than One Location  
(Sequential Broadcasting) ............................................................................. 4-11  
Transmitting the Document ........................................................................ 4-11  
Adjusting the Quality of Your Faxes .................................................................. 4-13  
Setting the Resolution .................................................................................. 4-13  
Setting the Contrast ..................................................................................... 4-15  
Sending PC Faxes ................................................................................................ 4-16  
Specifying Send Fax Information ................................................................ 4-16  
Creating a Fax Memo ................................................................................... 4-22  
Sending a PC Fax From a Windows Application ....................................... 4-23  
Using the Send Fax Manager .............................................................................. 4-25  
Fax Status ...................................................................................................... 4-26  
Stopping an Active Job ................................................................................. 4-28  
Sending a Scheduled, Held, Failed, or Stopped PC Fax ............................. 4-28  
Viewing a Job ................................................................................................ 4-29  
Deleting a Job ............................................................................................... 4-29  
Using the Fax Log ................................................................................................ 4-29  
Displaying the Fax Log.................................................................................. 4-30  
Designing a Fax Cover Page ............................................................................... 4-31  
Opening the MultiPASS Cover Page Designer ........................................... 4-31  
Using the Cover Page Designer ................................................................... 4-32  
Creating a New Cover Page ......................................................................... 4-34  
Modifying a Predefined Fax Cover Page ..................................................... 4-42  
Adding Additional Annotations to Your Cover Page ................................. 4-49  
Reverting to the Last Saved Version ............................................................ 4-51  
Renaming a Cover Page ............................................................................... 4-51  
Printing a Cover Page ................................................................................... 4-52  
Deleting a Cover Page .................................................................................. 4-52  
5
Receiving Faxes  
Receiving Documents ......................................................................................... 5-1  
Receiving Documents Automatically—Fax Only Mode ............................ 5-2  
Receiving Both Documents and Telephone Calls Automatically—  
Fax/Tel Mode ............................................................................................ 5-2  
Receiving Documents Manually—Manual Mode ...................................... 5-3  
Using an Answering Machine—Ans. Machine Mode ................................ 5-4  
Printing Documents Received in Memory ........................................................ 5-5  
Receiving While Copying, Printing, or Registering .......................................... 5-6  
Receiving Faxes to the MultiPASS Desktop Manager ....................................... 5-6  
Receiving a Fax Into the In Box ................................................................... 5-7  
Printing a Received Fax When Your Computer Is Off ............................... 5-8  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) Feature ....................... 5-9  
Types of Ring Patterns ................................................................................. 5-9  
How DRPD Responds to Calls .................................................................... 5-10  
Communicating Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) Feature ....................................................................................... 5-10  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Exploring the ScanGear Window ....................................................................... 6-2  
Displaying Information About the Scan Driver ......................................... 6-3  
Scanning With the Desktop Manager ................................................................ 6-3  
Scanning From a Windows Application ............................................................ 6-4  
Setting the Preview Scan Options ...................................................................... 6-5  
Setting the Scan Mode ................................................................................. 6-5  
Setting the Scan Resolution ......................................................................... 6-6  
Setting Preferences ....................................................................................... 6-7  
Setting Paper Size ......................................................................................... 6-8  
Setting Black and White Options ................................................................ 6-9  
Adjusting the Preview Image for Final Scan ..................................................... 6-9  
Clearing the Preview Area ........................................................................... 6-9  
Adjusting the Preview Image View .............................................................. 6-10  
Adjusting the Selection Size ......................................................................... 6-10  
Moving an Image ......................................................................................... 6-11  
Reversing the Image Tone ............................................................................ 6-12  
Mirroring an Image ...................................................................................... 6-12  
Rotating an Image ........................................................................................ 6-12  
Scaling the Image Output Size .................................................................... 6-12  
Adjusting Conrast and Brightness .............................................................. 6-13  
7
Working With Documents in The Desktop Manager  
Managing Your Documents in the Desktop Manager ...................................... 7-1  
Selecting Documents in the Desktop Manager .......................................... 7-1  
Printing a Document in the Desktop Manager .......................................... 7-3  
Creating a Folder .......................................................................................... 7-4  
Moving a Document .................................................................................... 7-4  
Copying a Document ................................................................................... 7-5  
Renaming a Document or Folder ................................................................ 7-5  
Deleting a Document or Folder .................................................................. 7-6  
Restoring a Deleted Document ................................................................... 7-7  
Emptying the Trash Folder .......................................................................... 7-8  
Importing a Document ................................................................................ 7-8  
Exporting a Document ................................................................................ 7-9  
Attaching a Document to Electronic Mail (E-mail) .................................. 7-9  
Manipulating a Document in Document View .......................................... 7-10  
Merging a Document ................................................................................... 7-12  
Indexing and Searching for Documents ..................................................... 7-12  
Modifying a Document ...................................................................................... 7-22  
Exploring the MultiPASS Viewer Window ................................................. 7-23  
Adjusting the Size and View of a Document .............................................. 7-25  
Editing the Base Image ................................................................................. 7-29  
Adding Annotations to Your Document ..................................................... 7-30  
Revising Your Annotations .......................................................................... 7-36  
Selecting One or More Annotations ........................................................... 7-37  
Reverting to the Last Saved Version ............................................................ 7-38  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the Document ....................................................................................... 7-38  
Previewing the Document Before Printing ................................................ 7-39  
Adjusting the MultiPASS Viewer Default Options ............................................ 7-39  
8
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Fax Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-2  
Setting Up Fax Preferences .......................................................................... 8-3  
Setting Up Send Fax Options ...................................................................... 8-4  
Setting Up Advanced Send Fax Fax Options .............................................. 8-5  
Setting Up Receive Fax Options .................................................................. 8-7  
Setting Up Advanced Receive Fax Options ................................................. 8-9  
Setting Up Speed Dial Assignments ............................................................ 8-12  
System Setup ........................................................................................................ 8-14  
Launcher Setup ................................................................................................... 8-15  
Editing a Launcher Application ................................................................... 8-17  
Using the Launcher ...................................................................................... 8-17  
Making a Phone Call From the Desktop Manager ........................................... 8-18  
Placing a Phone Call .................................................................................... 8-18  
Using the MultiPASS Server ............................................................................... 8-19  
Using the Minimized MultiPASS Server ..................................................... 8-20  
Using the MultiPASS Server Window ......................................................... 8-20  
Status Messages ............................................................................................. 8-21  
Closing the MultiPASS Server ............................................................................ 8-22  
Removing the MultiPASS Server From StartUp ......................................... 8-23  
Restarting the MultiPASS Server ................................................................. 8-23  
Adding the MultiPASS Server to Startup .................................................... 8-24  
Disconnecting the MultiPASS ............................................................................ 8-24  
Uninstalling the Desktop Manager .................................................................... 8-25  
Removing the Printer and Fax Drivers ....................................................... 8-25  
Uninstalling the Desktop Manager ............................................................. 8-25  
Uninstalling the Scan Software (ScanGear) ................................................ 8-26  
Completing the Uninstall Process ............................................................... 8-26  
Reinstalling the Desktop Manager .............................................................. 8-26  
9
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
MultiPASS Guidelines ......................................................................................... 9-2  
Routine Maintenance .......................................................................................... 9-3  
Cleaning Inside the MultiPASS .......................................................................... 9-3  
Cleaning the Scanner Components.............................................................. 9-4  
Printing the Nozzle Check .................................................................................. 9-7  
Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head ............................................................... 9-8  
BJ Cartridge Guidelines ...................................................................................... 9-9  
BJ Cartridge and BJ Tank Maintenance ...................................................... 9-10  
Using Ink ....................................................................................................... 9-11  
Replacing the BJ Cartridge ................................................................................. 9-11  
Replacing a BJ Tank in the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge .................................... 9-16  
Storing a BJ Cartridge ......................................................................................... 9-19  
Transporting the MultiPASS ............................................................................... 9-20  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Troubleshooting  
Paper Jams ........................................................................................................... 10-3  
Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ....................................... 10-3  
Jams in the Sheet Feeder .............................................................................. 10-5  
LCD Messages ...................................................................................................... 10-6  
Printing Problems ............................................................................................... 10-11  
Print Quality Problems........................................................................................ 10-14  
Color Printing Problems...................................................................................... 10-16  
Paper Feeding Problems ...................................................................................... 10-17  
Faxing Problems .................................................................................................. 10-19  
Telephone Problems ............................................................................................ 10-23  
Copying Problems ............................................................................................... 10-23  
General Problems ................................................................................................ 10-24  
Technical Notes ................................................................................................... 10-25  
Using Other Bi-directional Devices ............................................................ 10-25  
MultiPASS Hardware Cannot Initialize ...................................................... 10-25  
Memory Clear Report ......................................................................................... 10-26  
Appendix A Specifications  
Printing Specifications ........................................................................................ A-1  
BJ Cartridges ....................................................................................................... A-4  
Facsimile .............................................................................................................. A-5  
Copier .................................................................................................................. A-7  
Scanner ................................................................................................................ A-7  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows ...................................................... A-9  
General Specifications ......................................................................................... A-10  
Receiving Faxes and Phone Calls Automatically—Fax/Tel Mode .................... A-12  
Appendix B Using the MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax  
LCD Menu System .............................................................................................. B-1  
Entering Information in the MultiPASS ............................................................ B-2  
Entering Your User Information ................................................................. B-2  
Glossary ....................................................................................................................... G-1  
Index ............................................................................................................................ I-1  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
Thank you for purchasing the Canon MultiPASS C3500—the multi-  
talented color printer for your home office and the whole family. We  
are sure that your MultiPASS C3500 will provide all you need in one  
machine: Color Bubble Jet printer, color scanner, color copier, plain  
paper fax, and PC fax.  
This chapter introduces you to the MultiPASS C3500. It includes:  
❍ Supplies and accessories  
❍ Getting help from Canon  
❍ Important safety instructions  
❍ Examining the main components of the unit  
❍ Using the operator panel  
❍ Loading paper in the sheet feeder  
❍ Preparing documents for faxing, copying, or scanning  
❍ Identifying your documents  
❍ Copying documents  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplies and Accessories  
Your MultiPASS C3500 supports excellent and unique print media  
options that will allow you to produce dazzling, professional, and fun  
presentations. All of these print media are specially designed and  
manufactured to work with your Canon MultiPASS C3500 so you can  
produce the finest output possible.  
Canon has an extensive dealer network equipped to offer you supplies as  
you need them. To find a dealer near you, call the Canon Referral  
Service at 1-800-848-4123.  
If supplies are not available from your local dealer, you can order  
directly from Canon by calling 1-800-385-2155.  
BJ Cartridges and BJ Tanks  
Your MultiPASS C3500 comes with:  
®
❍ One BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
❍ One SB-21 Ink Cartridge Storage Box  
❍ One extra BCI-21 Black BJ Tank  
You can also purchase the following BJ cartridges for use with the  
MultiPASS C3500:  
❍ BC-20 Black BJ Cartridge  
❍ BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge  
❍ BC-29F Neon BJ Cartridge  
You can purchase the following BJ tanks for use in the BC-21e Color  
BJ Cartridge:  
❍ BCI-21 Black BJ Tank (one extra BJ tank comes with the printer)  
❍ BCI-21 Color BJ Tank  
1-2 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BJ cartridges contain the Bubble Jet print head and ink, while BJ tanks  
contain ink only. Some BJ cartridges, like the BC-21e Color BJ  
Cartridge, contain replaceable BJ tanks; when you run out of ink, you  
can replace the empty tank. Some BJ cartridges, like the BC-20 Black  
BJ Cartridge, contain both the print head and ink; when you run out of  
ink, you replace the entire BJ cartridge. See Chapter 9, Maintaining the  
MultiPASS C3500, for details on replacing BJ cartridges and BJ tanks.  
N
N
Canon has more engineers dedicated to creating quality ink for  
providing the best results for output on Bubble Jet products than any  
other organization. Canon does not prohibit the use of third-party inks  
and the use of third-party inks does not invalidate the product’s limited  
warranty. However, Canon cannot guarantee the quality or performance  
of your MultiPASS C3500 when you are using inks from other suppliers.  
Canon’s limited warranty does not cover damage caused to Canon’s  
Bubble Jet products that is attributable to the use of third party parts or  
supplies, including inks. The limited warranty remains in effect for its  
life once that particular damage has been properly repaired.  
For optimum printing results, Canon recommends that you use only  
Canon ink cartridges.  
Canon Specialty Papers  
Canon manufactures numerous specialty papers, including:  
❍ Glossy Photo Paper GP-201  
❍ Banner Paper  
❍ Brilliant White Paper  
❍ High Resolution Paper HR-101  
❍ T-Shirt Transfers TR-101  
❍ Greeting Cards GC-101  
❍ Bubble Jet Paper LC-301 (water resistant)  
❍ Fabric Sheet FS-101  
❍ Transparencies CF-102  
❍ Back Print Film BF-102  
❍ High Gloss Film HG-101  
See Chapter 2, Printing With the MultiPASS C3500, for details on  
Canon’s Specialty Papers.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can also purchase the optional Canon BC-22e Photo Kit, which  
includes everything you need to produce photo-realistic images:  
❍ BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge  
❍ SB-21 Ink Cartridge Storage Box  
❍ Canon High Resolution Paper HR-101 (60 sheets)  
Getting Help From Canon  
Canon Computer Systems, Inc. offers a full range of customer technical  
support* options including:  
❍
24-hour, 7-day-a-week, toll-free automated support for troubleshooting  
issues on most current products (1-800-423-2366)  
❍ Speak to a technician free of service charge (currently Monday–  
Friday, 8:00 A.M.–10:00 P.M. EST, excluding holidays) for products  
still under warranty** (1-757-413-2848)  
❍ Speak to a technician for a service charge (currently $24.99 per  
call) during holidays and days/hours not listed above regarding  
urgent product questions or for products no longer under warranty  
(1-800-423-2366)  
Or for a charge of $2.50 per minute, to a maximum of $25.00 per  
call (1-900-246-1200)  
❍ E-mail support via the Canon Computer Systems, Inc. Web site  
(www.ccsi.canon.com)  
❍ 24-hour, toll-free Fax Retrieval System (1-800-526-4345)  
❍ To download the latest drivers using your modem, 24-hour Bulletin  
Board Service (1-757-420-2000)  
*Support program specifics subject to change without notice.  
**Refer to individual product information for warranty details.  
Canon Canada  
Within Canada, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week (1-800-263-1121)  
In other countries, please contact your Canon dealer.  
1-4 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Servicing the MultiPASS C3500  
The Canon MultiPASS C3500 is designed with the latest technology  
to provide trouble-free operation. The warranty card that comes with  
your MultiPASS describes Canon’s limited warranty. Be sure to read the  
warranty information to find out about the different service options  
available to you.  
Save your sales receipt for proof of purchase. In the event that your  
printer needs service, you will need your proof of purchase to obtain  
warranty service.  
N
Be sure to fill out the Registration card and send it in. This will help  
Canon give you better support service.  
If you seem to have a problem, try to solve it by referring to the  
troubleshooting information in Chapter 10. If you cannot solve the  
problem, contact the Canon Computer Systems Customer Care Center  
(see previous page for details).  
If you feel your MultiPASS needs servicing, contact Canon on the World  
Wide Web to locate the Canon Authorized Service Facility (ASF) nearest  
you. If you do not have access to the Web, you can call Canon (see  
previous page for details).  
Important Safety Instructions  
Read these safety instructions and refer to them later if you have any  
questions.  
Except as explained in this manual, do not attempt to service the  
MultiPASS C3500 yourself. Opening and removing interior covers may  
C
expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing  
to a Canon Authorized Service Facility (ASF). Call the Customer Care  
Center for details.  
❍ Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the MultiPASS and  
inside the printer cover.  
❍ Place the MultiPASS on a sturdy level surface. Do not place it on an  
unstable cart, stand, or table. If the unit falls, it could be seriously  
damaged.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Do not use the MultiPASS near water. If you spill liquid on  
or into the unit, unplug it immediately and call the Customer Care  
Center.  
❍ Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are  
provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the  
MultiPASS and to protect it from overheating, do not block or cover  
these openings. Do not block the openings by placing the unit on a  
bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. Do not place the unit near a  
radiator, nor in a closet or built-in cabinet unless proper ventilation  
is provided.  
❍ Operate the MultiPASS only from the type of power source  
indicated on the unit’s label. If you are not sure of the type of power  
available, consult your dealer or local power company.  
❍ Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord, and do not locate  
the MultiPASS where the cord will be walked on. Make sure the  
power cord is not knotted or kinked.  
❍ Do not push metal objects of any kind into the slots or openings on  
the cabinet. This could result in a risk of fire or electric shock.  
❍ Do not allow small objects (such as pins, paper clips, or staples) to  
fall into the MultiPASS. If something does fall into it that you  
cannot remove, unplug the unit immediately and call the Customer  
Care Center.  
❍ Unplug this product from the wall outlet and call the Customer Care  
Center if any of the following conditions exist:  
The power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.  
•
Liquid is spilled into the unit, or if the unit is exposed to rain  
or water.  
•
Smoke, unusual noises, or odors come from the unit.  
•
The unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.  
•
The unit does not operate normally when you have followed the  
•
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are  
covered by the operating instructions in the Quick Start Guide  
and this User’s Manual. Improper adjustment of other controls  
may result in damage and may require extensive work by a  
qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
1-6 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Components of the MultiPASS C3500  
Before using the MultiPASS C3500, it’s a good idea to familiarize  
yourself with the components and understand their functions.  
Front View  
SENDING DOCUMENT SUPPORT  
HOLDS DOCUMENTS AS THEY FEED  
INTO ADF  
PAPER REST  
SUPPORTS PAPER  
STACKED IN THE  
SHEET FEEDER  
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT  
FEEDER (ADF) AND  
PRINTER COVER  
HOLDS DOCUMENTS  
TO BE SCANNED (UP  
TO 30 SHEETS)  
SHEET FEEDER  
HOLDS 100 SHEETS  
OF PLAIN PAPER  
PAPER GUIDES  
ADJUST TO WIDTH  
OF DOCUMENT TO  
BE SCANNED  
OPERATOR PANEL  
USE TO CONTROL  
THE MultiPASS C3500  
DOCUMENT SUPPORT  
HOLDS SCANNED  
DOCUMENTS AS  
THEY EXIT THE  
MultiPASS C3500  
OUTPUT TRAY  
HOLDS PRINTED DOCUMENTS AS  
THEY EXIT THE MultiPASS C3500  
OUTPUT TRAY EXTENSION  
HOLDS PRINTED DOCUMENTS AS  
THEY EXIT THE MultiPASS C3500  
PAPER OUTPUT GUIDES  
HOLD HIGH RESOLUTION  
PAPER WHEN USING THE  
BC-22e PHOTO BJ CARTRIDGE  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Back View  
LINE JACK  
TELEPHONE/  
ANSWERING  
MACHINE/  
MODEM  
JACK  
POWER CORD  
CONNECTOR  
MANUAL FEED  
SLOT  
PARALLEL CABLE  
CONNECTOR  
Inside the Printer Area  
PAPER THICKNESS LEVER  
CARTRIDGE HOLDER  
PRINTER COVER  
1-8 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Operator Panel  
This section presents a brief description of the operator panel on the  
MultiPASS C3500.  
3
LCD DISPLAY  
2
RECEIVE MODE  
4
RESOLUTION  
DOCUMENT FEED  
LEVER  
ONE-TOUCH SPEED  
DIAL/FUNCTION  
BUTTONS  
1
5
11  
NUMBER BUTTONS  
REDIAL/PAUSE  
10  
6
STOP  
ALARM  
CODED DIAL  
9
7
8
START/COPY  
1
2
Document feed lever  
Set this lever to the left ( ) for automatic feed or to the right ( ) for  
manual document feed.  
RECEIVE MODE button  
Press to change the Receive Mode: Manual mode, Fax Only mode,  
Answer Machine mode, or Fax/Tel mode. The Receive Mode set during  
installation overrides this setting.  
3
LCD display  
Displays messages and prompts during operation. Displays selections,  
text, numbers, and names when registering information.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RESOLUTION button  
Press this to select the resolution the MultiPASS will use for the  
document you want to fax or copy.  
5
One-touch Speed Dial/Function buttons  
Use for one-touch speed dialing, entering user information, printing  
documents stored in memory, and cleaning the print head. (See the next  
page for details.)  
6
7
STOP button  
Press to cancel sending, receiving, or any other operation.  
ALARM light  
Flashes when an error occurs, when the MultiPASS is out of paper or  
ink, or when received faxes are stored in memory.  
8
9
START/COPY button  
Press to begin sending, receiving, copying, or other operations, or to  
select functions when registering information.  
CODED DIAL button  
Press this button (followed by a two-digit code) to dial a number that  
you have registered for coded speed dialing.  
10  
REDIAL/PAUSE button  
Press to redial the last number that was dialed using the number  
buttons, or to enter pauses between digits when dialing fax numbers.  
11 Number buttons  
Use these buttons to enter numbers and names when registering  
information, and to dial fax/telephone numbers that are not registered  
for automatic dialing.  
1-10 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Function Buttons  
FUNCTION button  
Use to register user settings, to run the print head cleaning process, or to  
print faxes stored in the MultiPASS’s memory.  
CARTRIDGE button  
Press to move the BJ cartridge holder to the center of the unit when  
installing or replacing the cartridge. (Press again after installing the  
cartridge to move the holder back to its home position on the right.)  
RESUME button  
Press when you want to form-feed paper when printing.  
PRINTER RESET button  
Press to reset the MultiPASS to Standby mode if the LCD displays  
PRINTER MODE.  
Arrow buttons  
Use to scroll through menu selections, or to move the cursor when  
registering data.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper in the Sheet Feeder  
The paper you load in the sheet feeder is used for printing documents  
or for incoming faxes. For printing documents, you can use any of  
the Canon Specialty Papers described in Chapter 2, Printing With the  
MultiPASS C3500. For receiving faxes, use plain paper (such as copier  
paper).  
When the message LOAD PAPER appears in the LCD display, you need to  
add paper to the sheet feeder. The sheet feeder holds approximately 100  
sheets of plain paper.  
Fan the paper.  
❍ For best results, fan the paper before loading it.  
❍ Always fan a stack of paper along the edge that will feed  
into the MultiPASS first.  
Make sure the  
paper rest  
❍ Pull the paper rest up until it stops.  
❍ Move the paper guide to the left to match the size of  
is extended.  
your paper.  
1-12 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slide the stack of  
paper into the  
sheet feeder  
❍ Align the edge of the paper with the right edge of the  
sheet feeder.  
❍ Secure the stack with the paper guide.  
until it stops.  
TAB  
Preparing Documents for Faxing,  
Copying, or Scanning  
You can use the MultiPASS to fax, copy, or scan documents that are  
printed on standard letter, legal, or A4 size paper. Follow these guidelines  
to prepare your documents.  
❍ Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents into the  
MultiPASS:  
wrinkled or creased paper  
•
curled or rolled paper  
•
torn paper  
•
carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
•
coated paper  
•
onion skin or thin paper  
•
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Remove all staples, paper clips, and the like before feeding the  
document.  
❍ Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is  
completely dry before feeding the document.  
❍ Make a photocopy of any document that will not feed into the  
MultiPASS. You can then feed the copy.  
❍ Do not feed documents with pages that are different sizes or of  
different thicknesses.  
Loading the Document  
You can load up to 30 letter or A4 size sheets and up to 10 legal size  
sheets at a time into the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).  
Stack your  
documents.  
❍ For a multiple-page document, fan the sheets and tap the  
document on a flat surface to even the stack.  
1-14 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feed the  
document.  
❍ Insert the document face down (letterhead first) into the  
ADF until you hear a beep.  
❍ Adjust the document guides to the width of the  
document.  
The MultiPASS automatically feeds the pages one by one from the  
bottom.  
If you have problems feeding multiple-page documents, insert the pages  
one at a time into the ADF. This stacks the pages on a slant so they feed  
correctly into the ADF. (Do not attempt to stack more than 30 sheets in  
the ADF.)  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Pages to the Document  
If you want to add pages while the MultiPASS is sending a document,  
wait until the last page is feeding into the unit and then insert the new  
sheets. Insert the first new page so it overlaps the last page by about one  
inch (2.5 cm).  
Always wait until the last page is being fed into the MultiPASS before  
you add new pages.  
Setting the Document Feed Lever  
You use the document feed lever on the ADF to select multiple  
documents ( ) or single sheets ( ).  
DOCUMENT FEED LEVER  
Always set the document feed lever to single sheets and manually feed  
the following types of documents:  
❍ Thick paper  
❍ Thin paper  
❍ Small documents (postcards, business cards)  
❍ Documents with uneven surfaces  
❍ Photographs  
❍ Special types of paper  
1-16 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Identifying Your Documents  
When sending a document, the following information is printed out  
by the receiving fax: your fax number, your name, and the current date  
and time. This information is called your TTI (Transmit Terminal  
Identification) and appears at the top of the faxed document in small  
type.  
In the United States, you are required by FCC regulations to include this  
information every time you send a fax.  
N
By identifying the documents you send, the receiving party will  
recognize your fax messages at a glance. The illustration below shows a  
sample document with the identifying information.  
THE DATE AND  
TIME YOU SENT  
THE DOCUMENT  
THE NAME OF THE  
PARTY WHO IS  
RECEIVING THE  
DOCUMENT  
YOUR FAX/  
TELEPHONE  
NUMBER  
THE PAGE NUMBER  
YOUR NAME OR  
COMPANY NAME  
The top line includes the name of the receiving party if you send the  
document using one-touch speed dialing, coded speed dialing, or group  
dialing and you registered the party’s name. It also includes the page  
number.  
You entered your fax header information during the MultiPASS  
installation procedure. If you followed the installation procedure, this  
information will be printed on the top of your outgoing faxes. If you did  
not install the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, see Appendix B, Using the  
MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax, for details on how to enter  
this information.  
N
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Documents  
One of the convenient features of the MultiPASS is its ability to make  
high-quality copies. You can make up to 99 copies of one document  
at a time.  
It’s a good idea to use the optional BC-20 Black BJ Cartridge when you  
make black and white copies.  
N
Make sure the optional BC-22e Photo Color BJ Cartridge is not installed  
when you are making copies.  
❍ Place the document face down in the ADF. The LCD  
Feed the  
document.  
displays these messages:  
MEMORY USED  
FAX FINE  
0 %  
DOCUMENT READY  
Press  
START/COPY.  
COPY 1 0 0 %  
0 1  
❍ The display shows the size of the copy (the default is  
100%) and the number of copies (the default is 1).  
1-18 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change the  
resolution if  
necessary.  
RESOLUTION  
❍ To change the copying resolution, press the  
button.  
B&W TEXT  
B&W PHOTO  
When copying in black and white:  
Use  
resolution for copying most text documents.  
B&W TEXT  
B&W PHOTO  
•
N
Use  
resolution when copying documents that contain  
•
photographs. This scans areas of the document that contain photos  
with 256 levels of gray, and results in a much better reproduction of  
the photograph.  
Select  
Reduction mode  
if necessary.  
❍ To reduce the size of the copies, use the < or > buttons to  
select the reduction percentage you want (70%, 80%,  
90%, or 100%):  
COPY  
8 0 %  
0 1  
Enter the  
number  
of copies.  
COPY 1 0 0 %  
0 2  
❍ To make multiple copies, use the number buttons to enter  
the number of copies (up to 99).  
Chapter 1  
Introduction 1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press  
START/COPY.  
COPY  
STOP  
❍ To stop copying at any time, press  
. You may need to  
lift the operator panel to remove the document (see page  
10-3 for details).  
START AGAIN  
reload the document and start copying again.  
❍ If an error occurs and the LCD displays  
,
If the LCD displays  
while making multiple copies  
MEMORY FULL  
of a document, do not use the multiple copy feature for copying the  
N
document. Make single copies of the document instead (as many times  
as required).  
You may be able to make multiple copies if you first print out any faxes  
that are stored in memory (see page 5-5).  
Miscellaneous  
If the Power Goes Out  
If power to the MultiPASS is cut off, any documents stored in its fax  
memory will be lost. Because of this, be sure to print documents stored  
in memory or resend them as soon as possible. (The MultiPASS  
automatically prints a Memory Clear Report when power is restored.  
See page 10-26.)  
While the power is out, the MultiPASS will receive telephone calls if a  
telephone is attached. However, you cannot send or receive faxes. (If you  
are using a cordless phone, you will not be able to make or receive calls.)  
Avoid unplugging the MultiPASS unless absolutely necessary. This is the  
same as a power outage.  
Using Switch Boxes  
Canon does not recommend using a switch box with the MultiPASS. To  
use more than one printer, it’s a good idea to add a second parallel port  
to your computer.  
1-20 Introduction  
Chapter 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing With the  
MultiPASS C3500  
2
This chapter describes how to use the MultiPASS C3500 to print your  
documents. Once you have installed the MultiPASS Desktop Manager,  
you can use the MultiPASS C3500 for all your printing needs.  
This chapter describes:  
❍ Paper handling  
❍ Installing a printer driver  
❍ Printing a document  
❍ Printer setup within Windows  
❍ Printing speed versus color  
❍ Setting the paper thickness lever  
❍ Printer settings for various print media  
❍ Loading paper  
❍ Printing on envelopes  
❍ Printing on Canon Specialty Papers  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Handling  
One of the most important things you can do to assure the best possible  
printing performance of your MultiPASS is to select the correct paper.  
Your MultiPASS produces letter quality print on most plain bond  
papers, including cotton bond and photocopying papers; it does not  
require special ink jet papers. However, the print quality varies with  
different paper types. Be sure to test a type of paper before you purchase  
a large quantity.  
Selecting Paper  
Plain Paper  
The MultiPASS supports paper sizes of letter, legal, and A4 in portrait  
orientation. You can use regular copier paper, cotton bond papers, and  
typical letterhead. Always use paper without curls, folds, staples, or  
damaged edges. Copier paper has a preferred side for printing. Look at  
the label on the package to see which side to print on.  
Glossy Photo Paper  
Canon Glossy Photo Paper GP-201 is a high gloss, thicker paper that  
produces the look and feel of a photograph. Use this paper with the  
BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge to produce photo-realistic prints from your  
printer. (Select Glossy Paper in the printer driver when you have this  
paper loaded.)  
Banner Paper  
This paper is specifically designed for printing one continuous sheet in a  
banner format. The connected sheets are divided by a perforation. You  
can print from two to six sheets at one time. Canon’s Banner Paper is  
specially designed for use with Bubble Jet printers and to produce bright  
and vivid color images. (In your printer driver, select Plain Paper for  
Media and Letter Banner for Size when you load this paper.)  
Brilliant White Paper  
Canon’s unique paper formulation gives you a bright white printing  
surface that produces incredibly brilliant colors and dark, crisp black  
text. This paper works great for proposals, color presentations, color  
charts/graphs, flyers, and newsletters. You can print on both sides of  
the sheet. (In your printer driver, select Plain Paper for Media when  
you load this paper.)  
2-2 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High Resolution Paper  
The Canon High Resolution Paper HR-101 is designed to produce  
photo-realistic quality output with sharp and vivid graphics. For best  
results, use the optional BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge to produce images  
comparable to your favorite photographs.  
T-Shirt Transfers  
Use Canon’s popular T-Shirt Transfers TR-101 to create and personalize  
T-shirts, sweatshirts, aprons, tablecloths, napkins, tote bags, and  
anything else your imagination allows! Use on any cotton or cotton/poly  
blend fabric. Your image is printed in mirror image (when you use  
T-Shirt Transfer mode through the MultiPASS printer driver for  
Windows) so when you iron it onto the T-shirt, the image is viewed  
correctly.  
Greeting Cards  
Get the most out of your Canon Creative or other card-making software  
with Canon Greeting Cards GC-101. These cards give your unique,  
personalized cards the look and feel of professional cards. You can create  
cards, invitations, announcements, and more.  
Bubble Jet Paper (water resistant)  
The Canon Bubble Jet Paper LC-301 has been developed for high quality  
printing with minimal or no smearing or running when in contact with  
water or damp surfaces, making it a good choice for damp or rainy  
environments. The paper is specially coated and printable on both sides.  
(Select Plain Paper in the printer driver when you load this paper.)  
Fabric Sheets  
Use Fabric Sheet FS-101 for Canon Bubble Jet products to print pillow  
covers, scarves, flags, and other textile items. Use these sheets for  
appliqués and other craft and sewing projects. Fabric sheets are  
9.5 × 14 inches.  
Back Print Film  
Canon Back Print Film BF-102 has been specially developed for Canon  
Color Bubble Jet printers and MultiPASS products. The film is designed  
to deliver brilliant, high-intensity color images suitable for business  
presentations, design work, or professional reports. Back print film is  
printed on the back (nonglossy) side of the film in mirror image and  
then viewed from the front (glossy) side using a backlighting device. For  
more details, ask a Canon Authorized Dealer for information or refer to  
the manual supplied with the film.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High Gloss Film  
The Canon High Gloss Film HG-101 features a bright white finish that  
lends striking visual power to charts, graphs, and photographic images.  
Use this film to make your presentation materials and graphics look  
professional.  
Transparencies  
CF-102 Transparencies from Canon are recommended. These  
transparencies produce excellent contrast, sharpness, and color.  
Assorted Paper Starter Kit  
If you would like to try some of the papers described above, look  
for Canon’s Starter Kit (SK-102). It contains an assortment of five  
paper types.  
Paper Guidelines  
When selecting or loading paper, please remember the following:  
❍ Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper can  
cause paper jams and poor print quality.  
❍ Use cut-sheet paper only. You cannot use multipart paper.  
❍ When using graph paper, the lines may not match because the  
1/6-inch line spacing of the printer is slightly less than that of  
graph paper.  
❍ If the print density of your page is very high, light paper stock may  
curl slightly due to the large amount of ink. If you need to print  
dense graphics, try printing on heavier stock.  
❍ Do not use thicker paper than meets the specifications for this  
printer. Printing with a paper that is thick enough to come in  
contact with the print head nozzles may damage the BJ cartridge.  
2-4 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a Printer Driver  
Before you can use any type of printer with your computer, you must  
install a printer driver. The printer driver tells the computer what kind  
of a printer you are using. The printer driver also controls the various  
settings, such as print quality and paper type. You define these settings  
within the printer driver, and the printer driver then communicates the  
settings to both the computer and the printer.  
You must install the MultiPASS Printer Driver for Windows and the  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager before you can use the MultiPASS C3500  
as a printer for your computer. If you followed the instructions in your  
Quick Start Guide, you have already installed the necessary software. If  
not, see your Quick Start Guide for details on how to install this  
software.  
Printing a Document  
This procedure describes the general steps required for printing from  
various Windows applications. The exact steps for printing a document  
may vary depending on the application program (such as Microsoft  
Word) you are using. Refer to your software application’s documentation  
for the exact printing procedure.  
Start your  
application.  
❍ Start the program you are using to create the document,  
and open the document you want to print.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Make sure the  
Canon MultiPASS  
C3500 Printer is  
selected as your  
default printer.  
❍ Choose Print or Print Setup from the File menu.  
❍ You will see a screen similar to this:  
❍ Click on the Properties (or Setup) button if you want to  
make any adjustments as appropriate for printing your  
document. (See Printer Setup Within Windows on the  
following page for details.)  
❍ After making any necessary changes to the printing  
parameters, select OK to start the print job.  
2-6 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Setup Within Windows  
You can use the MultiPASS with all your Windows 98 and Windows 95  
applications. Be sure to set the MultiPASS as the default printer for all  
your Windows operations.  
Most of your printing operations are controlled by your software  
application. The following sections describe how you set certain options  
directly from the printer driver; you only need this information if your  
application does not control printing.  
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box  
in Windows 98/95  
You can open the Properties dialog box in one of the following ways:  
❍ From within any Windows application, you can select the Print or  
Print Setup command.  
❍ From the Printers folder, you can select the printer and then select  
the Properties command from the File menu.  
❍ From the Printers folder, you can select the printer, click the right  
mouse button, and then select Properties from the drop down list.  
Using the Printer Driver in Windows 98/95  
The printing options are displayed on these Windows 98/95 tabs:  
General, Details, Paper, Graphics, and Setting. See Using the Windows  
Tabs on the next page for details.  
For detailed information on any of the printing options, you can use the  
Windows 98/95 online Help in the following ways:  
N
❍ Use the right mouse button to click an item on the screen; then  
click the What’s This? command.  
❍ Click the question mark ? in the upper right corner and then click  
an item.  
❍ Press  
.
F1  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Windows Tabs  
The MultiPASS Printer Driver for Windows has several tabs from which  
you can select your printing options and learn about your printer driver  
as well as your MultiPASS C3500.  
❍ General  
This tab allows you to add comments regarding the printer driver  
and print a test page or a separator page. (You see this tab when  
you open the Properties dialog box from the Printers folder, but you  
do not see it when you open the Properties dialog box from within a  
Windows application.)  
ADD COMMENTS  
HERE  
PRINT A  
SEPARATOR  
PAGE  
PRINT A TEST PAGE  
❍ Details  
This tab allows you to specify printer port settings, spool settings,  
and time-out settings. (You see this tab when you open the  
Properties dialog box from the Printers folder, but you do not see it  
when you open the Properties dialog box from within a Windows  
application.)  
DEFINE THE  
PRINTER’S PORT  
SPECIFY THE  
PRINTER DRIVER  
SPECIFY TIMEOUT  
SETTINGS  
SPECIFY SPOOL  
SETTINGS  
SPECIFY PORT  
SETTINGS  
2-8 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Paper  
This tab allows you to specify page orientation, paper size, and type  
of print media.  
SPECIFY PAGE  
ORIENTATION  
SPECIFY SIZE  
OF PAPER  
SPECIFY TYPE  
OF PAPER  
SPECIFY  
PAPER FEED  
METHOD  
❍ Graphics  
This tab allows you to specify print quality, color model, and print  
model.  
ENABLE OR  
SPECIFY PRINT  
DISABLE IMAGE  
QUALITY  
COLOR MATCHING  
SELECT A COLOR  
MODEL (THE  
COLOR MODEL  
ENABLE OR  
YOU SELECT  
DISABLE FINE  
DEPENDS ON THE  
MODE  
BJ CARTRIDGE  
INSTALLED; BE  
SURE TO CHANGE  
THIS SETTING  
WHEN YOU  
CHANGE  
CARTRIDGES.)  
SELECT A  
PRINT MODEL  
ENABLE OR  
DISABLE IMAGE  
OPTIMIZER  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Setting  
This tab allows you to turn on or off the Setup Analyzer. It also  
allows you to save up to four custom print settings.  
ENABLE OR  
DISABLE SETUP  
ANALYZER  
SAVE YOUR  
CUSTOM PRINT  
SETTINGS  
Specifying Your Printing Options  
Be sure to use your online help to find out about the settings available  
for each printing option.  
❍ To move between the Windows tabs, click on any of the tabs.  
❍ To select the settings and exit, click the OK button.  
❍ To cancel your setting selections on a tab, click the Cancel button.  
❍ To save your settings without exiting, click the Apply button.  
❍ To access helpful information about the MultiPASS and the printer  
driver, click on the Help button.  
❍ To find out about a setting, click the question mark ? in the upper  
right corner. Move the larger question mark to the setting you are  
interested in and click again.  
2-10 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Graphics Settings  
You can select the following printing options from the Graphics tab to  
achieve the specified results.  
Driver settings  
To achieve  
Print Quality  
Color Model  
Results  
Fastest B&W  
Draft  
Monochrome  
Monochrome  
Monochrome  
Uses less ink. Output  
quality is draft.  
output possible  
180 × 180 dpi  
Fast letter quality  
output  
Standard  
360 × 360 dpi  
Slightly slower than  
draft. Quality is standard.  
Fast B&W photograph Standard and  
and graphic output  
Slower than B&W but  
better grayscale quality.  
Fine On  
360 × 360 dpi  
High quality  
output  
High and  
Monochrome  
Monochrome  
Produces highest  
resolution output.  
Fine Off  
720 × 360 dpi  
High quality  
photograph and  
graphic output  
High and  
Slower than Standard but  
optimizes B&W grayscale  
quality.  
Fine On  
720 × 360 dpi  
Fast color output  
Draft  
Color  
Color  
Color  
Uses less ink. Output  
quality is draft.  
180 × 180 dpi  
Color output  
Standard  
360 × 360 dpi  
Fast color printing but  
quality is not optimized.  
High quality  
color output  
High and  
Uses Drop Modulation  
Technology to optimize  
color print quality but the  
print speed is slower.  
Fine On  
720 × 360 dpi  
Photo-realistic  
color printing  
Standard  
Photo Color  
Photo Color  
Produces photo-realistic  
color printing. (Requires  
BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge  
and High Resolution  
360 × 360 dpi  
Paper HR-101 or Glossy  
Photo Paper GP-201.)  
True photo  
quality printing  
High  
360 × 360 dpi  
Uses Drop Modulation  
Technology™ to produce  
true photo quality.  
(Requires BC-22e Photo  
BJ Cartridge and High  
Resolution Paper HR-101  
or Glossy Photo Paper  
GP-201.)  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Setup Analyzer  
The Setup Analyzer allows the printer driver to evaluate your choice of  
printing settings. On the Setting tab, you click on the green ✔ to enable  
the Setup Analyzer. Click on the red symbol to disable it.  
When you exit the printer driver and accept your printing settings by  
clicking the OK button, the Setup Analyzer (if enabled) checks to see if  
any of your settings are contrary to the recommended settings. If there  
are inconsistencies, a dialog box similar to this appears:  
The inconsistencies appear with check boxes. You can use the dialog box  
buttons to select or deselect the inconsistencies and to fix or ignore the  
inconsistencies.  
2-12 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Speed Versus Color  
The MultiPASS Printer Driver for Windows can interpret and translate  
the full spectrum of colors, up to 16.7 million colors. When printing  
color, there is a significant increase in the amount of information that  
the driver has to interpret and translate. When printing black ink only,  
the driver has only one color to interpret.  
By decreasing the amount of colors that the printer driver has to  
interpret, you can significantly decrease the time needed to translate the  
information. This will speed up the overall printing process.  
You select the settings described below using the Windows tabs of the  
MultiPASS Printer Driver. See Using the Windows Tabs starting on page  
2-8 for details.  
N
For Quick Color Printing  
In the MultiPASS Printer Driver for Windows, choose the following  
printing operations. These selections allow the printer driver to interpret  
and translate 256 colors, which will increase your printing speed.  
However, your print quality will not be optimized.  
❍ Media Type—Plain Paper  
❍ Print Quality—Standard; Fine is off  
❍ Color Model—Color  
❍ Print Model—Custom  
❍ Color Selection—Fast Color  
For High Quality Color Printing  
For the MultiPASS, select the printing options shown below to allow the  
printer driver to interpret and translate up to 16.7 million colors. Keep  
in mind that your print speed will be slower than with other setting  
combinations.  
❍ Print Quality—High; Fine mode is on  
❍ Color Model—Color  
❍ Print Model—Automatic  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Monochrome Printing  
Use the optional BC-20 Black BJ Cartridge to optimize the printer’s  
performance when you are printing black text and graphics only.  
In the printer driver, choose the following printing options to tell your  
MultiPASS to print using black ink only.  
❍ Media Type—Plain Paper  
❍ Print Quality—Standard  
❍ Color Model—Monochrome  
❍ Print Model—Automatic  
Other Ways to Improve Print Speed in Windows  
To improve printing speed, you can try the following:  
Avoid diffusion halftones  
In the Custom Settings dialog box, choose Diffusion for halftoning only  
when printing final output or photographic images. Choosing Fine  
allows documents to print as much as 20% faster because the computer  
does not need to compute to “best possible position” for each dot.  
Avoid screen matched color  
In the Custom Settings dialog box, avoid Match as the Color Adjustment  
setting. The screen matching feature takes longer to process in the  
computer because it requires special information.  
Avoid automatic settings  
Although the automatic settings are easy to use, the computer must  
interpret the printed page. This takes more time than if you select each  
setting.  
Free up your memory  
Use only one software program at a time and unload any screen saving  
utilities or programs stored in Windows background; this frees up more  
memory for Windows processing.  
2-14 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Monochrome when possible  
If you will be printing text in black ink only, choose a Color Selection  
of Black and White rather than Grayscale. Print draft documents in  
Monochrome rather than Color, or use Draft print quality when  
printing color.  
Limit the number of colors on each page  
The computer will need to calculate and transmit fewer dots per inch  
(dpi). Too many colors can make the image confusing and less effective  
as well as cause the print speed to slow down.  
Use primary colors when printing presentation graphics  
Use black, cyan, yellow, magenta, blue, green, and red when possible.  
The computer will need to calculate and transfer less dot information.  
Use the Draft print quality  
The printer will need to image fewer dots.  
Use Plain Paper as the Media Type  
The print head will make only one pass for each printed line.  
Use smaller graphics and more white space in your documents  
The computer will be able to prepare the print file faster.  
Add RAM to your computer  
The computer will be able to prepare the print file faster.  
Use a computer with a faster processor  
The computer will be able to prepare the print file faster.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Paper Thickness Lever  
To ensure trouble-free paper handling, you’ll want to set the paper  
thickness lever before loading paper.  
❍ Center for color BJ cartridges  
❍ Left for black BJ cartridges  
❍ Right for heavier-weight print media or envelopes  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
GUIDE RAIL  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
RIBBON CABLE  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
ROUND SHAFT  
Be sure to check this lever when you change BJ cartridges, and before  
and after printing on heavier-weight print media or envelopes.  
N
Open the  
printer cover by  
grasping the  
paper guides  
and lifting up.  
2-16 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press the  
CARTRIDGE  
CARTRIDGE  
BUTTON  
button to move  
the cartridge  
holder to the  
center of the unit.  
Set the paper  
thickness lever.  
❍ Set the paper thickness lever to left, center, or right  
according to the BJ cartridge and paper type. See  
page 2-16 for details.  
Complete the  
operation.  
CARTRIDGE  
again to move the cartridge holder  
❍ Press  
back to its home position.  
❍ Close the printer cover.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Settings for Various Print Media  
Paper  
Paper  
thickness lever  
Paper feed  
output  
Media  
BC-21e  
BC-20 guides Method  
Limit (Sheets)  
Plain paper  
Center  
Left  
Down  
Up  
Auto  
Approx. 100  
(0.4" or 10 mm stack)  
Glossy Photo Paper  
GP-201  
Center  
Right  
Auto or  
Manual  
1
Banner Paper  
Up  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
1 (2 to 6)  
Brilliant White Paper Center  
Left  
Down  
Up  
Approx. 100  
High Resolution  
Paper HR-101  
Center  
Approx. 80  
(0.4" or 10 mm stack)  
T-Shirt Transfers  
TR-101  
Right  
Right  
Down  
Down  
Down  
Down  
Down  
Down  
Down  
Down  
Auto or  
Manual  
1
1
Greeting Cards  
GC-101  
Manual  
Bubble Jet Paper  
LC-301  
Center  
Left  
Auto  
Approx. 100  
(0.4" or 10 mm stack)  
Fabric sheet  
FS-101  
Right  
Auto or  
Manual  
1
Transparencies  
CF-102  
Center  
Center  
Center  
Right  
Auto  
50  
10  
1
Back Print Film  
BF-102  
Auto  
High Gloss Film  
HG-101  
Manual  
Manual  
Other heavier-weight  
print media  
1
Envelopes  
Single  
Right  
Right  
Down  
Down  
Manual  
Auto  
1
15  
Stack  
2-18 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
You can stack paper in the sheet feeder to load it automatically, or you  
can manually feed one sheet at a time through the manual feed slot.  
You can place approximately 100 sheets of plain paper (20 lb or  
75 g/m2) in the sheet feeder at a time.  
You can stack approximately 50 sheets of transparency film or 10 sheets  
of back print film in the sheet feeder. However, these special media may  
not advance correctly under unusual environmental conditions (such as  
extreme temperatures or humidity). If you have trouble with special  
papers becoming skewed or feeding multiple sheets, do not stack them  
in the sheet feeder. Load them one sheet at a time.  
Automatically Feeding Paper  
Set the paper  
thickness lever.  
❍ Center for color BJ cartridges.  
❍ Left for black BJ cartridges.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pull the paper  
support up  
❍ Move the paper guide to the left to match your paper size.  
until it stops.  
Fan the paper.  
❍ For best results, fan the paper before loading it.  
❍ Always fan a stack of paper along the edge that will feed  
into the printer first.  
2-20 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slide the stack  
of paper into  
❍ Align the edge of the paper with the right edge of the  
sheet feeder.  
the sheet feeder  
until it stops.  
❍ Secure the stack with the paper guide.  
❍ Start your print operation.  
Auto Feed Guidelines  
When automatically feeding stacks of paper, follow these guidelines:  
❍ Do not leave paper stacked in the printer for long periods of time;  
longer sheets of paper may become bent or curled over time. This  
may cause the paper to misfeed or jam.  
❍ If your printed page contains lots of graphics, the ink on the page  
may be damp due to the print density. Remove the page right away  
and allow the ink to dry.  
❍ The capacity of the paper output tray is 30 sheets of paper. To  
reduce paper jams, remove paper from the output tray before the  
count reaches 30.  
❍ If paper curls after printing, remove it immediately; otherwise, paper  
jams may occur.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ The platen (a roller on the inside of the printer) may become inked  
if you print data beyond the width of the page. If this happens, clean  
the platen with a soft cloth. (For details on cleaning the platen, see  
page 9-4.)  
❍ Depending on the density of your printed pages, the ink may need  
time to dry. Within two to three seconds, the ink becomes smudge  
resistant. After drying for several minutes, the ink becomes water  
resistant.  
❍ Do not try to load paper into the sheet feeder beyond the paper  
limit mark ( ) or the tab on the right side of the sheet feeder;  
stacking too much paper may cause paper feeding or printing  
problems.  
PAPER LIMIT  
MARK  
NO GAP HERE  
NO GAP HERE  
❍ Make sure there are no gaps between the stack of paper and the  
paper guide or the right edge of the sheet feeder.  
2-22 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manually Feeding Paper  
You use the manual feed function when printing on heavier-weight print  
media (24 lb to 28 lb or 90 g/m2 to 105 g/m2).  
You cannot receive faxes when paper is loaded in the manual feed slot.  
N
Check the paper  
thickness lever.  
❍ If you are manually feeding heavier-weight print media,  
set the paper thickness lever to the right.  
DO NOT TOUCH  
THE GUIDE RAIL  
DO NOT TOUCH  
THE RIBBON  
CABLE  
Start your  
print operation.  
❍ If you are using Windows, you must select Manual Feed  
in the MultiPASS Printer Driver for the printer to accept  
manually fed paper.  
❍ You will see this screen:  
❍ Remove any paper in the sheet feeder and click Continue.  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-23  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you are  
prompted, insert  
the single sheet.  
❍ You see this screen approximately 5 seconds after clicking  
Continue.  
❍ Make sure the print side is facing up.  
❍ Align the sheet with the left edge of the manual feed slot,  
and keep the leading edge of the paper perpendicular to  
the left edge.  
❍ Slide the paper into the manual feed slot in the back of  
the printer until it stops.  
❍ Hold the sheet for about two seconds until it feeds  
automatically.  
❍ The printer will automatically load the paper into  
position.  
❍ When ready, click Continue in the Add Paper dialog box.  
After printing on thick paper or envelopes, set the paper thickness lever  
(inside the printer) back to the left or center position before printing on  
other paper types.  
2-24 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing On Envelopes  
You can stack up to 10 envelopes in the sheet feeder or you can manually  
feed envelopes one at a time.  
U.S. Commercial number 10 (COM10) envelopes and European DL  
envelopes are recommended. You may be able to stack envelopes of  
other sizes in the sheet feeder; however, Canon cannot guarantee  
consistent performance on envelope sizes other than COM10 and DL.  
The following envelopes are not recommended because they may cause  
jams or smears, or may damage your printer.  
❍ Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, and  
double flaps.  
❍ Envelopes made with special coated paper or deeply  
embossed paper.  
❍ Envelopes using peel-off sealing strips.  
❍ Envelopes in which letters have been enclosed.  
When you are ready to print on envelopes, follow these steps to stack  
envelopes in the sheet feeder. (You can also manually feed envelopes one  
at a time.)  
Make sure the  
paper thickness  
lever is set to the  
right (A).  
DO NOT TOUCH  
THE GUIDE RAIL  
DO NOT TOUCH  
THE RIBBON  
CABLE  
❍ Close the printer cover.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prepare the  
envelopes.  
❍ Arrange the stack of envelopes on a firm surface and  
press down firmly on the edges to make the folds crisp.  
❍ Press all the way around the envelopes to remove any  
curls and expel air from inside the envelopes.  
PRESS DOWN FIRMLY ON  
THE EDGES OF THE FLAP  
❍ Remove any curling from the envelopes by holding the  
edge of the envelopes diagonally and bending them  
gently.  
❍ Make sure the flaps of the envelopes are flat and not  
curled.  
2-26 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert the  
envelopes.  
❍ Slide a stack of envelopes into the sheet feeder until it  
stops.  
❍ Align the edge of the paper guide with the left edge of the  
stack of envelopes.  
❍ Insert the envelopes with the print side up.  
❍ Feed the top of the envelope (return address portion)  
into the sheet feeder first.  
❍ Make sure the back flap is toward the sheet feeder.  
Now you can start your print operation.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Canon’s Specialty Papers  
This section provides guidelines for printing on Canon’s Specialty Papers  
and describes special procedures required for High Resolution Paper,  
Fabric Sheets, and Banner Paper.  
Specialty Paper Guidelines  
Be sure to read any instructions that come with your Canon Specialty  
Paper. These instructions provide important information regarding how  
N
to achieve the highest print quality with these papers.  
Follow these guidelines:  
❍ When automatically feeding transparencies or back print film,  
remove each sheet after it is delivered. Do not allow film sheets to  
stack up.  
❍ Let the printed sheets of film or paper dry completely before storing  
them.  
Paper type  
Drying time  
Canon High Gloss Film HG-101  
Canon Glossy Photo Paper GP-201  
Canon Fabric Sheet FS-101  
Canon Transparencies CF-102  
Canon Back Print Film BF-102  
10 minutes  
10 minutes  
1 hour  
15 minutes  
15 minutes  
❍ When your output has dried completely, cover its printed side  
with a sheet of plain (not coated) paper before storing it; this is  
recommended even if you place the sheets of film in a clear file or  
plastic holder.  
2-28 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ When loading transparencies or back print film, insert one sheet of  
plain paper as the last sheet in the stack.  
❍ Do not leave the film in the sheet feeder for long periods of time.  
Dust and dirt may accumulate on the film resulting in spotty  
printing.  
❍ To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, use a pair of thin cloth  
gloves while loading and handling the film.  
❍ To avoid fading, do not expose the printed film to prolonged  
sunlight.  
❍ Store unused papers and films flat. Do not remove papers from their  
protective packaging until you are ready to use them.  
❍ Store unused film at temperatures between 59°F to 86°F (15°C to  
30°C). The relative humidity should be between 10% and 70%.  
Uncurling Back Print Film  
If Back Print Film becomes curled, follow these steps to uncurl it:  
Cover the  
nonglossy side  
of the film  
with a sheet  
of plain paper.  
Roll the film  
and paper up in  
the direction  
❍ Do not roll the film too tight.  
❍ The film and paper rolled together should be about one  
inch (2.5 cm) in diameter.  
opposite the curl.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep the film  
rolled up for  
about five  
❍ You may want to fasten the roll with a small piece of tape.  
minutes.  
Canon’s High Resolution Paper HR-101  
Using the Paper Output Guides  
The output tray on your MultiPASS is equipped with paper output  
guides. When using the optional BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge or BC-29F  
Neon BJ Cartridge to print on Canon’s High Resolution Paper HR-101,  
lift the paper output guides on both sides of the output tray.  
These guides help support the document as it exits the MultiPASS. The  
guides keep the sheet from sagging as it exits and pulling through the  
unit, which can lead to poor print quality.  
❍ Lift both paper output guides until they are vertical. Always lift both  
output guides.  
2-30 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ When the output guides are raised, the output tray can hold a  
maximum of 30 sheets.  
❍ When you finish using the BC-22e Photo or BC-29F Neon  
BJ Cartridge with High Resolution Paper, lower the output  
guides to their original position.  
❍ Always lower the paper guides when using the MultiPASS as a  
fax machine. The guides may cause paper to pile up and jam.  
Using the Cleaning Sheet  
Canon’s High Resolution Paper HR-101 is designed for high quality  
printing. This paper is specially coated to produce delicate color output.  
After using a package of High Resolution Paper (200 sheets), you need  
to use the cleaning sheet enclosed with the paper to remove paper dust  
from the printer’s rollers; this will help prevent paper feed problems.  
Set up  
❍ Make sure the paper thickness lever is to the center.  
the printer.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remove the two  
pieces of tape  
from the sheet.  
Insert the  
cleaning sheet.  
❍ Insert the sheet with the sticky side out (toward you) and  
down (going into the sheet feeder).  
❍ Adjust the paper guide to the edge of the cleaning sheet.  
2-32 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To feed the sheet,  
press FUNCTION  
on the one-  
FUNCTION  
❍ Press the < or > button until ROLLER CLEANING appears.  
touch speed  
dial keypad.  
ROLLER CLEANING  
❍ Press START/COPY.  
The cleaning sheet feeds through the  
unit and ejects.  
Fabric Sheet FS-101  
Fabric Sheet FS-101 for Canon printers comes with a booklet that  
describes special handling procedures. Be sure to look through this  
booklet for special information regarding the Fabric Sheet. This section  
describes specific steps for using Fabric Sheets with the Canon Bubble  
Jet products.  
Be sure to follow these guidelines:  
❍ To avoid paper jams, smearing, and other problems, do not open the  
printer’s cover during printing.  
❍ Do not touch newly printed fabric sheets until the ink is completely  
dry. This takes about one hour.  
Do not use the fixing agent that comes with the Fabric Sheet FS-101. This  
agent is NOT needed when printing with the MultiPASS C3500.  
N
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing On a Fabric Sheet  
Set up  
the printer.  
❍ Make sure the paper thickness lever is to the right  
position.  
❍ Make sure the paper support and paper output tray are  
extended.  
DO NOT TOUCH  
THE GUIDE RAIL  
DO NOT TOUCH  
THE RIBBON  
CABLE  
Insert the  
fabric sheet.  
❍ Insert the sheet with the cloth side out (toward you) and  
the open end up (away from the sheet feeder).  
❍ Adjust the paper guide to the edge of the fabric sheet.  
OPEN END AT THE TOP  
2-34 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set up  
the MultiPASS  
Printer Driver  
for Windows.  
❍ In the Paper tab, select A4 for the Paper Size and select  
Fabric Sheet for the Print Media.  
❍ In the Graphics tab, select High for the Print Quality. You  
may also want to select Fine mode.  
❍ Start the print operation from your Windows application.  
Dry and  
then wash the  
fabric sheet.  
❍ Let the printed fabric sheet set for about one hour to  
allow the ink to completely dry.  
❍ When dry, peel the film backing from the printed fabric  
sheet.  
❍ Wash the printed fabric sheet for about three minutes  
under lukewarm running water to remove extra ink.  
❍ Hang the fabric sheet up to dry it again.  
❍ Iron the dried fabric sheet with a clothes iron.  
❍ See the booklet that comes with Fabric Sheet FS-101 for  
details on drying and washing.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing On Banner Paper  
Banner paper is a continuous sheet of paper with perforations at equal  
distances along its length where it can be cut to the length required. For  
best results, use Canon’s Banner Paper.  
To set up a print job on banner paper, you must decide on the number  
of sheets you need. You can print banners from 2 to 6 sheets in length.  
Always leave an extra sheet at the end of the banner—just in case the  
type runs over.  
N
N
The shaded portions of the drawing below illustrate the maximum  
recommended printing area of banner paper.  
Printing on banner paper requires quite a bit of ink. If you think your  
BJ cartridge may run out of ink, use a new BJ cartridge.  
For best print results on banner paper, use light design patterns.  
To prevent ink from running over the edges of the sheet, print within  
the margins shown in the previous illustration.  
2-36 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Position the  
MultiPASS.  
❍ Place the MultiPASS near the edge of a table so that the  
paper can flow over the edge as it exits the unit.  
❍ Make sure the paper rest is extended.  
Set the paper  
thickness lever.  
CARTRIDGE  
button to move the cartridge  
❍ Press the  
holder to the center of the unit.  
❍ Open the printer cover by grasping the document guides  
and lifting.  
❍ Set the paper thickness lever.  
Set it to the center if you are using the BC-21e Color  
BJ cartridge.  
•
Set it to the left if you are using the BC-20 Black  
BJ cartridge.  
•
DO NOT TOUCH THE RIBBON CABLE  
DO NOT TOUCH THE GUIDE RAIL  
DO NOT TOUCH THE ROUND SHAFT  
❍ Close the printer cover.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust the  
paper output  
tray.  
❍ Raise both output guides on the paper output tray.  
Cut the banner  
paper along  
one of the  
❍ Your banner can be up to 6 sheets (66 in./1676 mm) long.  
perforations to  
the length  
required.  
2-38 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Place the paper  
behind the  
MultiPASS on a  
flat surface.  
Gently fold along  
the perforations  
between the first  
and second sheets.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert the first  
sheet into the  
sheet feeder until  
it stops.  
❍ Make sure the sheets behind the unit are also aligned with  
the sheet feeder.  
Slide the paper  
guide against the  
edge of the sheet.  
❍ Leave a 0.04 inch (1 mm) gap between the paper guide  
and the edge of the sheet.  
❍ Make sure the sheet is under the tabs on the sheet feeder  
and paper guide.  
2-40 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Open the  
Windows  
application you  
will be using.  
❍ From the File menu, select Print.  
❍ Use the MultiPASS C3500 Printer Driver to select the  
print options.  
Select Auto Feeder for the Paper Feed method.  
•
Select Banner for the Media Type.  
•
❍ Select other options according to your software and  
operating system. See your software instructions for  
details.  
Enter 1 for the number of copies. Selecting any other  
number may print the sheets in the wrong order.  
•
For the number of sheets, enter the number of sheets  
you are printing.  
•
❍ Click OK or PRINT to begin printing.  
Allow the paper to flow over the edge of the table as it exits the  
MultiPASS.  
Chapter 2  
Printing With the MultiPASS C3500 2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-42 Printing With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager  
3
The MultiPASS Desktop Manager is a full-featured Windows application  
that enables you to use your MultiPASS C3500 from your computer. The  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager coordinates the printing, PC faxing, and  
scanning functions of the MultiPASS C3500. Its features include:  
❍ Printing, PC faxing, and scanning control functions  
❍ Manipulating and editing the faxed or scanned documents  
❍ Folders that hold your faxes and scanned documents  
❍ An Address Book where you store the names and fax numbers for  
individuals and groups to whom you repeatedly send faxes  
This chapter describes:  
❍ Starting the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
❍ Exploring the MultiPASS Desktop Manager window  
❍ Using the Desktop Manager folders  
❍ Viewing documents in the Desktop Manager  
❍ Setting up the Address Book  
Your MultiPASS C3500 is designed to be used with the MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager. To use all the outstanding features of the MultiPASS  
C3500 requires use of the Desktop Manager. To use the unit as a stand-  
alone fax machine, see Appendix B.  
N
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
When you start Windows, the MultiPASS Server is automatically  
started as well. The MultiPASS Server enables and monitors the  
communication between the Desktop Manager and the MultiPASS  
C3500. The MultiPASS Server must be open before you can open  
the Desktop Manager.  
Once installed, you select the MultiPASS Desktop Manager from the  
Programs list.  
❍ Click the Start button and point to Programs.  
❍ Point to Canon MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3.0 and then click  
Canon MultiPASS Desktop Manager.  
When you exit the Desktop Manager, you close only the Desktop  
Manager window. Any documents you have set up to PC fax or print  
remain active. The MultiPASS Server and the Send Fax Manager, which  
tracks the progress of your active jobs, remain open and active.  
3-2 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exploring the MultiPASS Desktop  
Manager Window  
When you start the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, you see a screen  
similar to this:  
MENU BAR  
ACTION TOOLBAR  
DOCUMENT TOOLBAR  
FOLDERS  
LIST  
WORK  
AREA  
COMMAND  
BAR  
STATUS BAR  
Menu Bar  
The menu bar contains the commands that enable you to perform the  
various Desktop Manager tasks. Many of the commands can also be  
accessed using their corresponding button on the toolbar.  
Document Toolbar  
The document toolbar provides quick access to certain tasks with a  
selected document. When a task is unavailable, the toolbar button  
appears dimmed.  
MANUAL  
INDEXING  
SELECT  
ALL  
DOCUMENT  
VIEW  
SPLIT  
ARRANGE  
SEARCH  
SHOW  
SEARCH  
RESULTS  
MERGE  
LIST VIEW  
DUPLICATE  
EDIT  
KEYWORDS  
REMOVE  
PAGE  
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Action Toolbar  
The action toolbar provides quick access to certain Desktop Manager  
tasks. When a task is unavailable, the toolbar button appears dimmed.  
MANAGE  
HELP  
CONTENTS  
COVER  
PAGES  
FAX  
SETUP  
FAX LOG  
SCAN  
IMPORT  
COVER  
PAGE  
SEND FAX  
MANAGER  
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
DELETE  
FAX  
MEMO  
DESIGNER  
Like any Windows toolbar, you can move either the action or document  
toolbar anywhere on the Desktop Manager workspace to suit your own  
working habits.  
ToolTips are also available, providing descriptions of the toolbar  
buttons. To display a ToolTip, pause the mouse pointer when it is  
directly over a button.  
Folders List  
The folders list contains folders that store your documents (sorted in  
alphabetical order). The list conains both system-defined folders, which  
were automatically created when you installed the software, and user-  
defined folders, which you create as you need them. As you add folders  
to the folder Cabinet, notice that the list displays similar to Windows  
Explorer, in a hierarchical view.  
Work Area  
The work area appears to the right of the folders list and displays the  
documents contained in the open folder. The documents are displayed  
either as a graphic thumbnail of each document (Document View) or a  
list of the documents (List view).  
The width of the work area can be adjusted by dragging the border (the  
split bar) between the work area and folders list.  
3-4 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Bar  
The command bar is located at the bottom of the work area and  
contains buttons that perform key processing tasks. In most cases, you  
simply drag a document from the work area onto the command bar  
button for the task you want to perform.  
LAUNCH  
APPLICATIONS  
EXPORT  
VIEW  
E-MAIL  
PRINT  
FAX  
You can also launch other Windows applications such as your e-mail  
program, Paint, or WordPad. Microsoft Paint is automatically placed on  
the Process toolbar. See page 8-16 for deails on how to add other  
programs to the Launcher.  
A Phone button displays in the command bar if you connect a  
telephone to your MultiPASS and you check the “Telephone Attached  
to Unit” option in the Desktop Manager Setup Options dialog box.  
(See Chapter 8, Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager.)  
You use the process toolbar buttons as follows:  
❍ Drag a document to the process button—For example, you can drag  
a document from a folder or from the work area to the Print button  
in order to print the document.  
If a document is dragged to a button that cannot perform the  
task, the mouse pointer displays as a “No” icon (a circle with a  
diagonal bar drawn through it ).  
❍ Highlight a document in a folder and then click a process toolbar  
button—This method activates the command for the selected  
document, as though the document had been dragged to the button.  
❍ Double-click a launching icon—This starts the application as if it  
were started from the Windows desktop.  
Status Bar  
The status bar displays information about the selected document or  
folder, or a description of the currently selected menu or toolbar  
command. It also displays the current date and time. The information is  
for display only and cannot be edited.  
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Desktop Manager Folders  
The Desktop Manager stores and organizes documents in folders. Only  
one folder can be open at a time. When you open another folder, the  
current folder automatically closes.  
You can organize your documents in any manner you want, placing  
documents in folders, or folders within folders as may be desirable.  
As previously mentioned, the organization of the folders list is much  
like Windows Explorer, which means you have great flexibility in  
determining how best to store your documents.  
System-defined Folders  
When you installed the Desktop Manager, a number of system-defined  
folders were automatically created—In Box, Sent Fax, Scan, Trash, and  
Cabinet (which contains the folders you create). You can tell which  
folder is open by the folder icon—it will look open or closed.  
You cannot add new folders or documents to the system-defined folders.  
The system-defined folders are reserved for use by the Desktop Manager  
in the following ways:  
❍ With the exception of the Trash folder, only the Desktop Manager  
can place documents in system-defined folders, based on faxes sent  
or received, or images scanned. Generally, you can only rename,  
copy, move, or delete documents from these folders.  
❍ The system-defined folders, including the Trash folder, cannot be  
deleted or renamed.  
❍ A document remains in a system-defined folder until you move it to  
a user-defined folder, or delete it.  
In Box Folder  
The In Box folder is automatically open each time you start the Desktop  
Manager (even if it is empty). It stores all incoming faxes that were sent  
to you by other fax machines, received by your MultiPASS, and then  
uploaded to your PC.  
3-6 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each received fax is displayed using a system-assigned name (for  
example, Untitled 0001). You can change the name to something more  
descriptive by highlighting the document, and choosing the Rename  
command from the Edit menu, or by clicking the right mouse button  
and choosing Rename. In the Rename dialog box, type the new name  
and click OK. Documents which have not been viewed in the In Box  
folder display in bold.  
Scan Folder  
The Scan folder stores all images you scan with the MultiPASS from the  
Desktop Manager. Each document displays with a system-assigned  
name, which you can change.  
Sent Fax Folder  
The Sent Fax folder contains all documents that have been successfully  
sent as PC faxes and that you requested not to be deleted after sending.  
Each sent fax displays with the name “Untitled”, which you can change.  
Trash Folder  
The Trash folder stores all the documents you remove from the folders  
list or work area. You move a document to the Trash folder by dragging  
it onto the Trash icon, or by highlighting the document and then using  
the Delete key (on your keyboard), the Delete command from the Edit  
menu (or by clicking the right mouse button), or the Delete toolbar  
icon.  
Once you move a document to the Trash folder, it remains there until  
you choose the Empty Trash command from the File menu. The Empty  
Trash command permanently removes all items in the Trash folder.  
User-defined Folders  
You can create an unlimited number of folders for your own use in the  
file Cabinet; the Cabinet acts as your “root directory.” You cannot place  
documents directly into the file Cabinet; you must place them in folders  
within the file Cabinet.  
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a New Folder  
1. Click the Cabinet icon, or the folder within which you want to store  
the new folder.  
2. Choose the New Folder command from the File menu, or click the  
right mouse button and choose New Folder.  
3. In the MultiPASS Create Folder dialog box, type a name for the  
folder and click OK.  
If you create multiple folders or place folders within folders, you can  
navigate among your folders and documents just like you do in  
Windows Explorer. To display the contents of a folder, either double-  
click it or click the (+) next to the folder name. To collapse an open  
folder tree, double-click it or click the (-) next to the folder name.  
3-8 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Documents in the Desktop Manager  
When you open a folder, you can view the documents which are  
contained in that folder in a List View or a Document View.  
When you first open the Desktop Manager, documents are automatically  
displayed in List View. However, you can change to Document View at  
any time by clicking the Document View button on the toolbar, or by  
choosing the Document View command from the View menu.  
If the number of documents within a folder exceeds the available work  
area, horizontal and/or vertical scroll bars display. You can use them to  
scroll the work area to view all the documents.  
To open a folder, click the desired folder in the folders list.  
Document View  
Document View displays each individual document as a thumbnail titled  
with the document name. For multiple page documents, the thumbnail  
also displays the page count, as well as scroll arrows at the bottom and a  
scroll box at the right side. The scroll arrows and scroll box enable you  
to page through a multi-page document, displaying each page in turn or  
moving to a particular page in the document.  
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document View allows you to work with an individual document at the  
page level: scrolling pages, removing a page, splitting a document, or  
merging two or more documents into a single document. You can  
rearrange the document thumbnails within the work area as needed by  
simply dragging them to the desired location. To equally align  
thumbnails, choose the Arrange command from the View menu.  
To view documents in a folder as thumbnails, make sure the folder is  
open. Then choose the Document View command from the View menu  
or click the Document View toolbar button on the Document toolbar.  
List View  
List View displays documents within the open folder as a list. Each  
document in the list displays an icon representing the document type,  
along with other pertinent information about the document (such as its  
name, page count, disk storage size, date and time of creation, and its  
origin). If the document is a fax, the connection number and ID are  
displayed.  
The icon designates the document type as fax, scan, or modified. A  
modified document is a document where the fax cover page has been  
removed, a scanned document that has been annotated, or a multi-page  
document that has been split into multiple documents.  
3-10 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Documents displayed in List View cannot be manipulated as in  
Document View, such as splitting a document or merging two or more  
documents. You can however, duplicate a document by highlighting it  
and choosing the Duplicate command from the Edit menu, or by  
clicking the right mouse button and choosing Duplicate.  
To view documents in a folder as a list, make sure the folder is open.  
Then choose the List View command from the View menu or click the  
List View button from the Document toolbar.  
Sorting Documents in the List  
You can change the order of the listed documents using any of the  
column labels displayed at the top of the list—type, name, number of  
pages, size, and date—by simply clicking on the column label. You can  
also select Sort By options from the View menu, or by clicking the right-  
mouse button in the work area. Sorting by page, size, or date and time  
displays documents with the largest document or most current  
document last. The list will display in the selected order each time you  
open the folder unless you change the sort option.  
To change the order of the list, click the title of the appropriate column  
at the top of the list. To return the sort to its previous order, click the  
column again.  
Viewing Documents  
To view a document, double-click it, or choose the Open Document  
command from the File menu. The MultiPASS Viewer will be launched  
and will display the selected page.  
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up the Address Book  
One of the first things you'll want to do in the Desktop Manager is set  
up your Address Book. Setting up an Address Book creates an easily  
accessible list of names and fax/phone/e-mail numbers for all of your  
business and personal contacts. Using the entries from the Address Book  
makes sending a PC fax quick and easy.  
Opening the Address Book  
On the Tools menu or toolbar, click Address Book.  
You see a screen similar to this:  
ADDRESS BOOK  
ENTRIES  
STATUS BAR  
COMMAND  
BUTTONS  
3-12 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Address Book Entries  
Address Book entries are listed alphabetically by last name, displaying  
both group and individual names, company name, phone, fax, and  
e-mail information. You can sort Address Book entries by any column  
description by simply clicking on the column title. To return the sort  
to its previous state, click the column title again.  
Status Bar  
The status bar displays additional information for a selected Address  
Book entry, based on whether the selected entry is an individual entry  
(title, street address, and comments) or group entry (comments about  
the group).  
Command Buttons  
Use the command buttons to perform various tasks while working with  
the Address Book, such as editing an entry, deleting an entry, creating a  
new entry or group, or importing/exporting information.  
To close the Address Book, simply click OK.  
To print the Address Book entries, click Print.  
Working With Address Book Entries  
There are two types of Address Book entries:  
Individual  
An individual entry allows you to identify each individual to whom you  
frequently send PC faxes. Once entered, you can quickly specify the  
recipient of a PC fax by selecting them from the Address Book.  
Group  
A group entry identifies two or more individual Address Book entries to  
whom you repeatedly send the same PC fax. For example, you may want  
to set up a group to include those individuals involved in a particular  
business project. When you specify the group entry as the fax recipient  
on your PC fax, the PC fax is sent to each individual in the group.  
Sorting the Address Book  
The Address Book is, by default, sorted alphabetically by last name. You  
can change the sort by clicking on any column title. To return the sort to  
its previous state, click the column title again.  
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding and Editing an Individual Address  
When setting up an individual Address Book entry, at a minimum, you  
must specify the contact’s first or last name, and their fax number.  
Optionally, if you want information available to include on a fax cover  
page, you can enter the contact’s phone number, title, company name,  
and address. You can also enter a comment to provide an internal  
reference about the recipient, and an e-mail address.  
1. With the Address Book open, click the desired command to add or  
edit an individual entry.  
To add a new individual, click New Individual.  
•
To edit an individual record, highlight the entry in the list, then  
click Edit.  
•
2. In the Individual Entry dialog box, enter or change this information.  
First Name, Last Name  
•
Phone number, Fax number, and E-mail address  
•
Whether your primary preference is to use this listing for faxing  
(the default selection) or e-mail  
•
Title, Company name, and Address (if you want the information  
available for a fax cover page)  
•
Comments (as an internal reference)  
•
Use Outside Dialing Prefix (if you need to use a prefix to access  
an outside line)  
•
3-14 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Save your entry.  
If adding a new entry, click Add.  
•
•
•
If editing an existing entry, click Replace.  
To cancel without saving any entry/changes which may have  
been made, click Cancel.  
Entering Fax Numbers, Phone Numbers, and  
E-mail Addresses  
When you enter the fax or phone number, or an e-mail address, you use  
the actual numeric characters plus any valid characters that separate the  
different segments of the number. For example, you can use 0 through 9,  
dash (-), parentheses (), and the @ symbol. The following characters are  
valid in the Desktop Manager:  
Character  
Description  
0 to 9 * # +  
Dialing digits  
Pause  
, p  
P
Last Pause  
T
Tone switch over function  
- ( ) Space  
Display-only characters; Space cannot be  
used at the beginning of a number  
If your phone system requires a prefix number to access an outside  
phone line, do not include it here. If required, define a prefix number  
in the Desktop Manager Setup Options dialog box (see page 8-4).  
N
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding and Editing a Group Address  
A group address consists of previously set up addresses, either  
individual(s) or other group(s). When adding a new group, you  
assign a name to the group, then select previously defined addresses  
from the Address Book to include in the new group. When editing  
an existing group address, you can add additional addresses or delete  
addresses from the group.  
1. With the Address Book open, click the applicable command to add  
or edit a group entry.  
To add a new group, click New Group.  
•
To edit a group, highlight the entry in the Address Book, then  
click Edit.  
•
2. In the Group Name box, enter or change the name you want to  
assign to this group.  
In the Address Book list box, click the individual entry you want  
•
to add to the group, then click Add. Repeat this step for each  
individual or group you want to add to this group.  
To remove an entry from the group, click the name in the Group  
list on the right, then click Remove.  
•
Enter any desired internal reference comments for the group in  
the Comments box.  
•
3-16 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Save your entry.  
If adding a new group, click Create.  
•
•
•
If editing an existing group, click Replace.  
To cancel without saving any entry/changes which have been  
made, click Cancel.  
Using a Group Address  
If you specify a group address when sending a fax, the address for each  
individual contained in the group is listed. If you specify more than one  
group address for a fax, any duplicate addresses are automatically  
removed. Separate fax jobs are created for each recipient in the group.  
Deleting an Address Book entry  
You delete an Address Book entry when it is no longer needed.  
To delete an entry, click the name in the Address Book, then click  
Delete, or press the Delete key on your keyboard. If prompted, confirm  
that you want to delete the entry.  
Printing the Address Book  
If you want a hard copy of the Address Book, you can print it as follows:  
1. With the Address Book open, click Print.  
2. In the Print dialog box, specify your print options and click OK.  
This report provides you with a hard copy of your Address Book  
information.  
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Importing an Address Book  
If you have an existing address book created in another application, you  
can import it into the Desktop Manager. You can also specify which  
fields you want to include.  
Any ASCII text file containing information that is separated by a comma  
or tab can be imported into the Desktop Manager Address Book.  
❍ If the address information in the text file is separated by a comma,  
the text file extension must be .CSV.  
❍ If the address information in the text file is separated by a tab, the  
text file extension must be .TXT.  
You must save your text file as a comma or tab separated text file before  
you import it into the Desktop Manager. If you attempt to import  
information from an improperly formatted text file, an error message  
displays alerting you to a problem and the import process stops.  
For procedures on saving a text file in the correct format, refer to the  
applicable application’s user documentation.  
Importing Addresses From a Text File  
1. With the Address Book open, click Import.  
2. Select the file type.  
In the Import Address Book dialog box, select whether you are  
importing a .CSV file or a .TXT file from the Files of Type list.  
•
Highlight the file you want to import, then click Open.  
•
3-18 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. In the Import/Export File Fields dialog box, select the address fields  
you wish to import from the Address Book Fields list.  
Highlight the field, then click Add.  
•
To remove a field, in the File Fields list box, click the field, then  
click Remove.  
•
To rearrange the order of the fields, highlight the field you want  
to move, then click Move Up or Move Down.  
•
Once you have the fields in the desired order, click OK.  
•
Exporting the Address Book  
You can export the Address Book from the Desktop Manager as an  
ASCII text file. Exported address information can be separated by either  
commas or tabs.  
❍ If you want to have address information separated by commas,  
choose to export to the .CSV file format.  
❍ If you want to have the address information in the text file separated  
by tabs, choose to export to the .TXT file format.  
Address Book information can only be exported for individual entries.  
Group addresses cannot be exported.  
N
Chapter 3  
Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. With the Address Book open, click Export.  
A message displays informing you that Group addresses cannot  
be exported. Click Yes to close the message.  
•
2. In the Export Address Book dialog box, select whether you are  
exporting a .CSV file or a .TXT file from the Files of Type list.  
Specify the location where you want to export the file, type a file  
•
name for the file in the File Name box, then click Open. The  
Import/Export dialog box displays.  
3. Select the address fields you want to export from the Address Book  
Fields list box.  
Highlight the field, then click Add.  
•
To remove a field, in the File Fields list box, click the field, then  
click Remove.  
•
To rearrange the order of the fields, highlight the field you want  
to move, then click Move Up or Move Down.  
•
Once you have the fields in the desired order, click OK.  
•
3-20 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
Chapter 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Faxes With  
the MultiPASS C3500  
4
You can use the MultiPASS C3500 to send paper faxes or PC faxes.  
PC faxing is the ability to send a fax from an application without first  
printing the document. Using the MultiPASS C3500 and the MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager, you can PC fax documents from any Windows  
application that supports printing.  
You can also set up an Address Book, containing fax and e-mail  
information for people to whom you often send faxes, and design your  
own fax cover page. To assist you in managing your faxes, a Fax Log  
maintains a record of every fax you send or receive.  
You can also customize your MultiPASS printer by changing the factory  
default user settings. This might include the date format that displays on  
your faxed documents, or how many times the MultiPASS calls another  
fax unit if the other party’s line is initially busy. You can also register  
one-touch/coded speed dial and group numbers using the Desktop  
Manager and then download them to the MultiPASS. For details on  
changing setup options, refer to Chapter 8, Setup and Other Utilities in  
the Desktop Manager.  
This chapter describes:  
❍ Sending a document  
❍ Sending a document to more than one location  
❍ Adjusting the quality of your faxes  
❍ Sending PC faxes  
❍ Using the Send Fax Manager  
❍ Using the Fax Log  
❍ Designing a fax cover page  
Because the MultiPASS is a multitasking device, you can send a fax and  
print a document at the same time.  
N
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Document  
The MultiPASS starts sending a document while it is being scanned into  
memory. When scanning a multipage document, the unit calls the other  
party after the first page is scanned. Once connection is made, the  
MultiPASS begins to transmit the information while the remaining pages  
are being scanned. This is called Memory Sending.  
Regular Dialing  
Feed the  
document.  
❍ Place the document face down in the Automatic  
Document Feeder (ADF). See page 1-14.  
❍ The LCD display shows how much of the unit’s memory  
is in use, then displays the current resolution, and then  
DOCUMENT READY  
the message  
.
MEMORY USED 0 %  
FAX STANDARD  
DOCUMENT READY  
❍ Change the resolution if necessary. See page 4-13.  
Dial the other  
party’s fax  
number.  
❍ Use the numeric buttons to dial the number.  
TEL=  
5 5 5 7 8 9 9  
4-2 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The MultiPASS begins scanning the  
document, and dials the number.  
Press START/COPY.  
TX  
❍ After a few seconds, the display shows the transaction  
number for the fax. This is a unique number the  
MultiPASS assigns to the document and uses to identify  
the document in transaction reports:  
TX/ RX NO.  
SCANNING  
CALLING  
0 0 0 1  
P.0 0 1  
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9  
The MultiPASS continues to show these displays in order  
while the fax is being scanned.  
❍ After the document is scanned in, the MultiPASS shows  
these displays while the fax is being sent:  
TX/ RX NO.  
0 0 0 1  
CANON FAX BACK  
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9  
ECM TX  
P.0 0 1  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ When the document has been sent successfully, the  
display shows these messages.  
TRANSMITTING OK  
TX/ RX NO. 0 0 0 1  
The MultiPASS automatically redials if the receiving fax does  
not answer, if the line is busy, or if a transmission error  
occurs. You can specify the number of times it redials using  
the Retries option in the Send Fax dialog box of the  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager (see page 8-4). If all redial  
attempts fail, the MultiPASS beeps intermittently for a few  
seconds. If this happens, check the fax number and try  
sending the fax again.  
ALARM  
If the  
light is flashing, correct the error described in  
STOP  
the LCD display, and then press  
the operator panel to remove the document from the ADF  
(see page 10-3).  
. You may need to open  
Automatic Dialing  
You can send a document using one-touch speed dialing, coded speed  
dialing, or group dialing. You must register the one-touch speed dialing  
numbers, the coded speed-dialing numbers, and the group dialing  
numbers using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager before you can send  
documents using these automatic dialing methods. See Setting Up Speed  
Dial Assignments on page 8-12.  
Load the  
document.  
❍ Place the document face down in the ADF.  
DOCUMENT READY  
4-4 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Press the one-touch speed dialing button (1 through 6)  
assigned to the number you wish to fax to; the name  
assigned to that button is displayed.  
Use automatic  
dialing.  
CANON FAX BACK  
OR  
CODED DIAL  
coded speed dialing code.  
❍ Press  
and enter the appropriate two-digit  
CCSI/ MKT  
❍ If a number is not registered for the button or codes, the  
NO TEL #  
LCD displays  
message. Make sure you pressed  
the correct button or entered the correct code and that  
the number you want to dial is entered correctly.  
STOP  
❍ If you make a mistake, press  
. Then press the correct  
CODED DIAL  
one-touch speed dialing button or press  
re-enter the code.  
and  
Press START/COPY.  
DIALING  
START/COPY  
❍ If you do not press  
within five seconds, the  
MultiPASS starts sending your document automatically.  
ALARM  
❍ If the  
light is flashing for any reason, correct the error  
STOP  
and press  
. You may need to open the operator panel to  
remove the document from the ADF (see page 10-3).  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Document Using Group Dialing  
If you frequently send plain paper faxes to the same group of people,  
you can use the MultiPASS Desktop Manager to assign a “group” of  
numbers to a speed dial code. (See page 8-13.)  
Feed the  
document.  
❍ Place the document face down in the ADF.  
DOCUMENT READY  
CODED  
❍ Press the one-touch speed dialing button or press  
Choose the  
group you wish  
to send to.  
DIAL  
and the code under which you registered the group.  
0 2 CANON GROUP  
Press START/COPY.  
SCANNING  
P.0 0 1  
❍ The MultiPASS starts scanning your document into  
memory five seconds after you select the group to  
which you will send the fax, even if you do not press  
START/COPY  
than one group).  
(ten seconds if you are sending to more  
❍ After scanning the document into memory, the  
MultiPASS automatically dials each number in  
the group.  
4-6 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ If there is no group registered under the one-touch speed  
dialing button or the two-digit code, the LCD displays the  
NO TEL #  
message. Make sure you entered the correct  
number and that the group has been registered correctly  
to a speed dial code. (See page 8-13.)  
STOP  
❍ If you make a mistake when dialing, press  
. You can  
then try again.  
Redialing  
Manual  
To start dialing again, just press REDIAL. The MultiPASS redials the  
previous number you dialed with the numeric buttons. Make sure the  
document is in the ADF.  
Automatic  
The MultiPASS automatically redials if the first attempt at sending fails  
(for example, if the line is busy). The unit redials twice, and the time  
between redials is two minutes. (These are the default settings.) The  
LCD displays AUTO REDIAL and the transaction number while the  
MultiPASS is redialing.  
AUTO REDIAL  
TX/ RX NO.  
XXXX  
If the MultiPASS fails to make a connection after the last redial, it  
beeps. The LCD displays BUSY/ NO SIGNAL; try sending again later.  
BUSY/ NO SIGNAL  
You can change the number of redials (retries) and the time between  
redials. The redialing options are set in the Send Fax dialog box of the  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager; see page 8-4.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Cancel Automatic Redialing  
STOP  
To cancel automatic redialing, press the  
button. However, you  
AUTO REDIAL  
cannot cancel redialing while the LCD displays  
(the unit is  
waiting to redial). In this case, wait until dialing begins and then press  
STOP  
to cancel redialing. The MultiPASS asks you to confirm:  
YES = (* )  
NO = (# )  
To cancel the redialing, press . The MultiPASS beeps and the LCD  
*
displays:  
TX/ RX CANCELLED  
TX/ RX NO.  
XXXX  
The unit then prints an error report:  
PRINTING REPORT  
Resending a Fax After an Error  
If you get an error while sending a fax from memory, the MultiPASS can  
resend it to the same destination without having to rescan it. To do this,  
the On Error Resend option must be set in the Advanced: Send Fax  
dialog box of the MultiPASS Desktop Manager. See page 8-5 for details.  
You can also set how much of the fax is sent again:  
❍ The entire document (All Pages)  
❍ The first page of the document, the page on which the error  
occurred, and all following pages (Error & First Pages)  
❍ The page on which the error occurred and all pages following the  
error (Error Pages)  
The fax is erased from memory after it is successfully sent or after the  
resending fails.  
N
4-8 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Sending  
If you would like to speak with the other party before sending a fax to  
them, you may do so; this is called manual sending. To use manual  
sending, you must have a telephone connected to the MultiPASS.  
Feed the  
document.  
❍ Place the document face down in the ADF.  
DOCUMENT READY  
Pick up the  
telephone and  
dial the other  
party’s fax  
TEL=  
4 5 6 7 8 9 9  
number.  
❍ You can use regular dialing or any of the automatic  
dialing methods.  
Converse with the  
other party.  
❍ If a person answers, you can converse normally. When  
you are ready to send the fax, ask them to press the start  
START/COPY  
button on their fax machine. Then press  
your unit and hang up the telephone.  
on  
Faxing starts.  
START/COPY  
will disconnect the call.  
❍ Be sure to press  
before you hang up, or you  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancel Sending  
To stop sending before a fax is complete, follow these steps:  
Press STOP.  
❍ If you are sending manually, the transmission is cancelled  
immediately.  
❍ If you are sending from memory, the LCD displays:  
YES = (* )  
NO = (# )  
❍ Press to cancel or press # to continue the transmission.  
*
Press  
*
or #.  
TX/ RX CANCELLED  
Transmission continues.  
If you press STOP while the document is being scanned, you may need  
to open the operator panel to remove the document (see page 10-3).  
4-10 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Document to More Than One  
Location (Sequential Broadcasting)  
Sequential broadcasting sends one document to more than one location.  
You can send to a total of 57 destinations as follows:  
One-touch speed dialing  
Coded speed dialing  
Regular dialing (numeric  
buttons dialing)  
= up to 6 destinations  
= up to 50 destinations  
= 1 destination only  
You can enter the one-touch and coded speed dialing numbers in any  
order. You simply press the one-touch speed dialing button, or press  
CODED DIAL followed by the two-digit code.  
You can also include one destination using regular dialing. This must be  
the last number you enter because you must press START/COPY after  
entering the number.  
If you often send to the same group of destinations, use group dialing  
(see page 8-13).  
N
Transmitting the Document  
❍ Place the document face down in the ADF.  
Feed the  
document.  
DOCUMENT READY  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dial the other  
party’s number.  
TEL=  
4 5 6 7 8 9 9  
❍ Simply enter the numbers one after the other:  
press the desired one-touch speed dialing button  
CODED DIAL  
or press  
followed by the two-digit code.  
❍ If you are sending to group dialing destinations, use the  
CODED DIAL  
one-touch speed dialing buttons and the  
button (along with the two-digit codes) to enter the  
groups.  
❍ You must press the second speed dialing number within  
five seconds of pressing the first one. Each subsequent  
speed dialing number must be entered within ten seconds  
of the preceding one.  
❍ You can enter only one number directly from the numeric  
keypad using regular dialing. This must be the last  
number you enter.  
Press  
START/COPY.  
TX  
❍ The MultiPASS scans the entire document into memory  
and begins sending.  
4-12 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍
The MultiPASS begins the operation approximately ten  
seconds after you press the last button (five seconds if you  
press only one button) even if you do not press  
START/COPY  
.
❍
The MultiPASS dials the destinations in numerical order  
starting with the coded dial numbers, then the one-touch  
numbers, and finally the regular-dial number (regardless of  
the order in which you entered the numbers).  
STOP  
❍ To cancel a transmission, press  
during the dialing  
or transmission. All subsequent transmissions in the  
sequence are cancelled. (You may need to open the  
operator panel to remove the document; see page 10-3.)  
If the memory becomes full while scanning your document, the LCD  
displays  
. (You may need to open the operator panel  
MEMORY FULL  
N
to remove the document; see page 10-3.) You can split the document  
into two or three different jobs, or you can try sending the document to  
one location at a time.  
Adjusting the Quality of Your Faxes  
Canon’s Ultra High Quality (UHQ™) imaging technology enables you  
to send faxes that have a print quality very close to that of the original  
document. The MultiPASS also allows you to adjust the resolution and  
contrast it uses in sending faxes to best suit your particular document.  
Setting the Resolution  
Resolution is a measure of the fineness or clarity of a printout and is  
usually expressed in horizontal and vertical dots per inch (dpi). Low  
resolutions may cause text and graphics to have a jagged appearance,  
while higher resolutions provide smoother curves and lines, crisp text  
and graphics, and a better match to traditional typeface designs.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The MultiPASS has three resolution settings. You use the RESOLUTION  
button to set the resolution for faxing documents.  
❍ FAX STANDARD  
Fax standard resolution (203 × 98 dpi) is adequate for most text  
documents.  
❍ FAX FINE  
Fax fine resolution (203 × 196 dpi) is suited for documents with fine  
print (smaller than the print in this sentence).  
❍ FAX PHOTO  
Fax photo resolution (203 × 196 dpi, with halftones) is for  
documents that contain photographs. With this setting, areas of the  
document that contain photos are automatically scanned with 64  
levels of gray, rather than just two (black and white) which it uses  
otherwise. This gives a much better reproduction of the photos,  
though transmission time is longer.  
RESOLUTION BUTTON  
4-14 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press the  
RESOLUTION  
button.  
❍ The LCD shows the current resolution.  
FAX STANDARD  
Press the  
RESOLUTION  
button again.  
RESOLUTION  
once or twice more to display the  
❍ Press  
FAX STANDARD FAX FINE  
FAX  
resolution you want (  
,
, or  
PHOTO  
).  
FAX STANDARD  
FAX FINE  
FAX PHOTO  
❍ After about five seconds, the LCD returns to Standby  
mode.  
0 8 / 1 1 / 9 8  
FaxTel  
Setting the Contrast  
Contrast is the difference in brightness between the lightest and  
darkest parts of a printed document. You can adjust the contrast the  
MultiPASS uses for sending faxes (Darker, Standard, or Lighter) through  
the Advanced: Send Fax dialog box in the MultiPASS Desktop Manager.  
(See page 8-5 for details.) Standard is the default, and is adequate for  
most documents. To darken a light original, choose Darker; to lighten  
a dark original, use Lighter.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending PC Faxes  
You can create a fax memo in the MultiPASS Desktop Manager or create  
and send a PC fax from any Windows application that supports printing.  
You can PC fax the document immediately, send it at a specific time, or  
hold it in the Send Fax Manager to be sent at a future time.  
Before sending a PC fax, make sure that the date and time in your  
computer is correct. The system date and time displays on all PC faxes  
that you send. If you need to change the date and time, refer to your  
Windows user documentation.  
N
Specifying Send Fax Information  
Whenever you send a PC fax, you see the MultiPASS Send Fax  
dialog box:  
4-16 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifying a Fax Recipient  
You must specify at least one fax recipient—the individual and/or group  
to whom you want to send the fax. When specifying a recipient, you can  
enter one-time information and/or include one or more recipients from  
your Address Book.  
A one-time recipient is specified by entering the recipient’s name (First  
Name and Last Name), Company name, and Fax number in the  
corresponding boxes of the Send Fax dialog box. In some office  
environments, you may also need to enter a prefix for the fax number,  
which is the number required to connect you to an outside phone line  
(usually 9). If so, click the Use Outside Dialing Prefix option so that a  
check appears. You define the outside dialing prefix in the Fax Setup  
options; see page 8-4).  
You can also add a new recipient to your Address Book directly from the  
Send Fax dialog box as described below.  
When you enter a fax number, use the actual numeric numbers plus any  
valid characters that separate the different segments of the fax number.  
For example, you can use 0 through 9, dash (-), or parentheses (). The  
following fax/phone characters are valid in the Desktop Manager:  
Character  
Description  
0 to 9 * # +  
Dialing digits  
Pause  
, p  
P
Last Pause  
T
Tone switch-over function  
- ( ) Space  
Display-only characters. Space cannot be  
used at the beginning of a number  
Including a fax recipient from the Address Book  
The Address Book box displays all recipients that you have set up in your  
Address Book. You can include one or more recipients by highlighting  
the name and clicking the Add button. Selected names display in the  
Recipients box and appear disabled in the Address Book box. This is to  
prevent you from selecting the same recipient twice.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a fax recipient  
You can remove a name included in the Recipients box by clicking the  
name and then clicking Remove. If the recipient was previously added to  
the Address Book, the name again becomes available in the Address  
Book box.  
Adding a new recipient to the Address Book  
1. Enter the recipient information in the First Name, Last Name,  
Company, Prefix, Fax, and Email Address boxes.  
2. Click New Individual Entry.  
3. Complete the fields in the New Recipient dialog box as necessary  
and click Add.  
For detailed instructions on adding a new individual to the  
•
Address Book, refer to Working With Address Book Entries on  
page 3-13.  
Entering a subject  
Enter text in the Subject box if desired.  
Defining Send Fax Options  
Attaching a cover page  
If desired, you can attach a cover page to your fax. The MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager contains a library of predefined fax cover pages, each  
providing a different style for both business and personal use. In  
addition, you can design your own cover page using the MultiPASS  
Cover Page Designer and add it to the library. Available cover pages are  
listed alphabetically in the Template list.  
For instructions on designing your own cover page, refer to Designing a  
Fax Cover Page on page 4-31.  
4-18 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Previewing the cover page  
To view a selected cover page before sending the fax, click Preview. The  
cover page displays the specified recipient(s) and other fax information,  
including memo text. This display is read only; you cannot edit it.  
To print the cover sheet, choose the Print command from the File menu.  
In the Print dialog, choose your printing options and click OK.  
To close the Preview window, choose the Exit command from the File  
menu. For instructions on editing a cover page, refer to Designing a Fax  
Cover Page on page 4-31.  
Entering fax sender information  
To identify yourself as the sender of the PC fax, enter your name and  
telephone number in the From and Phone boxes. Once you send your  
first PC fax, this information is automatically displayed the next time  
you send a PC fax. You can change the information as necessary.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering a memo  
You can include a memo on the fax cover page if the cover page is  
designed to accept memo text. The font, style, and size of the memo text  
is determined by the particular design of the selected cover page. You  
can change these attributes using the MultiPASS Cover Page Designer.  
For instructions on editing a cover page, refer to Designing a Fax Cover  
Page on page 4-31.  
Deleting the fax after sending  
If you select the Delete after Sending option, the fax is automatically  
deleted after it has been successfully transmitted. This option makes it  
easy to keep your computer free of unneeded documents, thereby  
maximizing your available disk space.  
If you do not select this option, the fax is automatically moved from the  
Send Fax Manager to the Sent Fax folder after transmission.  
Including annotations  
Using the editing capabilities of the MultiPASS Viewer (described  
in Chapter 7, Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager, you  
may have modified your document—for example, by adding text  
annotations, graphic or text stamps, or highlighting. In this case, you  
can choose to include these modifications by clicking the Include  
Annotations option.  
If you do not select this option, the original version of the document is  
faxed, without any added annotations.  
Processing the Fax  
You can send your fax—either now or later—only when you have  
specified at least one recipient and fax number. As necessary, you can  
also place a fax on hold and return to it later. The following sections  
provide additional information on these processing options.  
Sending the fax now  
When you click Send Now, the fax document is sent to the Send Fax  
Manager until it is transmitted. Once transmission is complete, the fax  
is either moved to the Sent Fax folder or deleted, based on whether you  
enabled or disabled the Delete after Sending option.  
4-20 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a fax fails (for example, because of an incorrect fax number), it  
remains in the Send Fax Manager until you attempt to resend it or  
delete it.  
For more information on working with the Send Fax Manager, see  
page 4-25.  
Sending the fax later  
If you prefer to send the fax later, you can specify the date and time  
to send it by clicking Send Later. In the Send Later dialog box, select  
the desired transmission date and time from their respective lists, and  
click OK.  
The fax is sent to the Send Fax Manager for processing at the specified  
date and time.  
Holding the fax  
You can place a fax document on hold at any time prior to sending  
it, as long as you have specified at least a fax number. The held fax is  
sent to the Send Fax Manager with no specified transmission time.  
Any fax information you entered—such as recipients or cover page  
information—is preserved. You can decide later whether to send the  
fax—revising the send information as needed—or to delete it.  
Canceling the fax  
If you cancel the fax while working in the Send Fax dialog, you are  
returned to the application where you originally initiated the Send Fax  
(or Print using the MultiPASS Fax driver) command.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a Fax Memo  
A fax memo is generally a brief (one-page maximum) fax sent directly  
from the Desktop Manager, without using another Windows application  
to create it. Operating directly from the Desktop Manager, you specify  
the same fax options as described in the Specifying Send Fax Information  
section starting on page 4-16.  
From the Desktop  
Manager, choose  
the Fax Memo  
command from  
the File menu  
or toolbar.  
In the Send Fax  
dialog box,  
enter your fax  
information and  
send fax options.  
❍ See Specifying Send Fax Information starting on page 4-16  
for details.  
4-22 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Because the fax memo is not originating from a document created in  
another Windows application, be sure to enter the memo message in the  
Memo box. Also, because your fax memo does not originate from a  
document that may have been annotated in the MultiPASS Viewer, the  
Include Annotations option is not available.  
N
The MultiPASS Desktop Manager sends the PC fax to the Send Fax  
Manager, where it is automatically given a unique system-assigned  
name, and its progress is tracked until it is actually transmitted. If you  
specified multiple recipients, an individual fax job for each recipient,  
with its own fax job number, is sent to the Send Fax Manager. Once  
transmitted, the fax is placed in your Sent Fax folder (unless you  
specified that it be deleted after transmission). A record of the sent  
fax is also recorded to the Fax Log.  
Sending a PC Fax From a Windows Application  
Create a PC  
fax document.  
Open the Windows application.  
Create and save the document.  
Make sure the document is open.  
❍
❍
❍
Select the Print  
command in the  
application.  
In most Windows applications, you select Print or Print  
Setup from the File menu or the toolbar.  
❍
❍ In the Print dialog box, make sure the Canon MultiPASS  
C3500 Fax is selected as your printer, then click Print.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the Send Fax  
dialog box,  
enter your fax  
information and  
send fax options.  
❍ See Specifying Send Fax Information starting on page 4-16  
for details.  
The MultiPASS Desktop Manager sends the PC fax to the Send Fax  
Manager, where it is automatically given a unique system-assigned  
name, and its progress is tracked until it is actually transmitted. If you  
specified multiple recipients, an individual fax job for each recipient,  
with its own fax job number, is sent to the Send Fax Manager. Once  
transmitted, the fax is placed in your Sent Fax folder (unless you  
specified that it be deleted after transmission). A record of the sent  
fax is also recorded to the Fax Log.  
4-24 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Send Fax Manager  
For each PC fax you send, a job is created in the Send Fax Manager. To  
display this window from the Desktop Manager, choose the Send Fax  
Manager command from the Tools menu or toolbar.  
To display the Send Fax Manager from the Windows desktop, click Start,  
then point to Programs. Point to Canon MultiPASS Desktop Manager  
3.0, then click Canon Send Fax Manager.  
MENU BAR  
TOOLBAR  
FAXES SENT  
AREA  
STATUS BAR  
Menu Bar  
The menu bar contains the commands that enable you to perform the  
various Send Fax Manager tasks. Many of the commands can also be  
accessed using their corresponding button on the toolbar.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toolbar  
The toolbar provides quick access for performing certain Send Fax  
Manager tasks. In circumstances where a task is unavailable, the toolbar  
button appears dimmed.  
The toolbar contains the following options:  
HELP  
STOP  
DELETE  
OPEN  
RESEND  
Faxes Sent Area  
The Send Fax Manager shows you the status of your faxes, the fax  
recipient (connection number and ID), its subject, number of pages and  
size, and date and time. The job currently being processed—the active  
job—displays at the top of the list. A job remains in the Send Fax  
Manager until it has been successfully transmitted, in which case, it is  
moved to the Sent Fax folder (unless you specified that faxes be deleted  
after transmission), or until you delete it.  
Status Bar  
You can display additional fax information in the Status Bar, by clicking  
on a job. When no job is selected, the Status Bar displays information  
about all jobs.  
Fax Status  
The Send Fax Manager displays the current status of each job. While  
working in the Send Fax Manager, you can:  
❍ Stop an active job from PC faxing  
❍ Send a PC fax that has been scheduled for sending later, held, or has  
failed  
❍ View a PC fax that has been scheduled for sending later, held, or has  
failed (you cannot edit or save a document using this method)  
❍ Delete a job that is not active  
4-26 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One of the following statuses is assigned to each job in the Send Fax  
Manager.  
Active  
The active job is the fax currently being PC faxed. When an active job  
completes successfully, it is automatically moved to the Sent Fax folder  
or deleted (based on whether you specified to delete after sending in the  
Send Fax dialog box).  
Queued  
A queued job is a fax waiting to be PC faxed. Queued jobs are processed  
in chronological order.  
Scheduled  
A scheduled job is a PC fax you specified to send at a later time.  
Retry  
A job receives the Retry status if the MultiPASS printer is busy with  
another task, and unable to transmit the PC fax.  
The Desktop Manager continues to try sending the fax until the  
transmission is successful or the Desktop Manager exceeds the defined  
number of retries. If a job cannot complete successfully within the  
specified number of retries, the job is marked with a Failed status. The  
job remains in the Send Fax Manager until you reprocess or delete it.  
On Hold  
A held job is a PC fax you chose to place on hold, rather than send it  
immediately. The held job remains in the Send Fax Manager until you  
choose to send or delete it.  
Failed  
A job receives a Failed status because a PC fax could not be sent  
successfully. This occurs because the Desktop Manager exceeded the  
defined number of retries. For example, a PC fax may have failed  
because of a continuously busy fax line or an incorrect fax number.  
When a job is changed to a Failed status, you will see a Fax Failed icon in  
the notification area of the Windows taskbar. A failed job remains in the  
Send Fax Manager until you attempt to reprocess or delete it.  
Stopped  
A stopped job is an active fax that you stopped from processing before it  
was completed. The stopped job remains in the Send Fax Manager until  
you attempt to reprocess or delete it.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stopping an Active Job  
If necessary, you can stop the active job from processing. When you do  
so, the Desktop Manager retains the job in the Send Fax Manager as a  
stopped job. You can later reprocess or delete the job.  
To stop an active job, open the Send Fax Manager and click Stop on the  
toolbar, or choose the Delete command from the Edit menu.  
Sending a Scheduled, Held, Failed, or Stopped PC Fax  
A PC fax job remains in the Send Fax Manager if it is scheduled for  
sending later, if it is on hold, if it failed to transmit in the specified  
number of retries, or it was stopped. You can reprocess the job for  
sending now or rescheduling it for a different time.  
When you send a PC fax from the Send Fax Manager, the Send Fax  
dialog box displays the information you initially entered for the PC fax.  
You can change the information as needed. For example, for a PC fax  
that failed because of a wrong fax number, you can correct the fax  
number and resend it. Or, for a scheduled PC fax, you can specify a  
different time for transmission.  
Additionally, if a cover page had been attached to the fax, you can edit  
any memo text or the cover page styles.  
Sending a Fax  
1. In the Send Fax Manager, click the job you wish to send, then click  
the Resend button on the toolbar, or choose the Resend Fax  
command from the Fax menu.  
2. In the Send Fax dialog box, change any fax options as needed.  
3. Process the fax as follows:  
To process the fax for immediate sending, click Send Now.  
•
To schedule the fax for a later time, click Send Later.  
•
4-28 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing a Job  
Documents in the Send Fax Manager can be viewed, but not edited or  
saved, as follows:  
❍ Click the job you want to view, then click the Open Document  
button on the toolbar, or choose the Open Document command  
from the Fax menu.  
❍ Double-click the job.  
Deleting a Job  
You can delete any job other than the Active job as follows:  
❍ Click the job you want to delete, then press the Delete key.  
❍ Click the job you want to delete then click the Delete button on the  
toolbar, or choose the Delete command from the Edit menu.  
Using the Fax Log  
The Fax Log contains a list of fax activity (faxes sent and received). The  
log lists information for each fax, such as transmission type and status,  
connection number and ID, document name, number of pages, file size,  
date and time the fax was sent or received, and the origin of the fax.  
You can use the Fax Log for a variety of purposes, such as reviewing the  
error status of a failed PC fax. When reviewing the Fax Log, you can also  
print it.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the Fax Log  
In the Desktop Manager, choose the Fax Log command from the Tools  
menu or the toolbar.  
You see a screen similar to this:  
❍ To display details and log notes about a particular fax document,  
click the fax to highlight it.  
❍ To delete an entry, highlight the entry and click Delete.  
❍ To close the Fax Log, click OK.  
❍ To print a hard copy of the Fax log, click Print.  
4-30 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Designing a Fax Cover Page  
In addition to the set of predefined fax cover pages that are  
automatically installed into your system, you can design your own fax  
cover page using the MultiPASS Cover Page Designer. You can also edit  
or annotate any existing cover page—one installed with the Desktop  
Manager software or created by you.  
When you create a new cover page, you define the page layout,  
background, graphics, and fax information fields. Fax information fields,  
or variable fields, provide areas where you place recipient and sender  
information for a specific fax. You can specify the size of the field, the  
font, font size, and style of the text displayed for each variable.  
You can use a new fax cover page by attaching it when sending a fax with  
the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, or by printing a hard copy and using it  
when sending a fax directly from the MultiPASS.  
Opening the MultiPASS Cover Page Designer  
From the MultiPASS Desktop Manager Tools menu, click Cover Pages,  
then choose the Cover Page Designer command.  
You can also select the Cover Page Designer from the toolbar.  
To close the cover page designer, choose the Exit command from the File  
menu in the Cover Page Designer window.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Cover Page Designer  
The Cover Page Designer window looks similar to this.  
MENU BAR  
FILE  
TOOLBAR  
IMAGE  
TOOLBAR  
DATA  
FIELDS  
(VARIABLES)  
LAYOUT  
AREA  
ANNOTATION  
TOOLBOX  
STATUS  
BAR  
Menu Bar  
The menu bar contains commands that allow you to create, edit, and  
print your fax cover page. Many commands can also be accessed by  
corresponding buttons on the toolbars.  
File Toolbar  
The File toolbar provides quick access to commands you use to open,  
save, print, edit and zoom a fax cover page.  
OPEN  
PRINT  
CROP  
REDO  
HELP  
SAVE  
COPY  
UNDO  
ZOOM  
4-32 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Toolbar  
The Image toolbar provides quick access to commands you use to select,  
lasso, move, zoom, straighten, or annotate a fax cover page.  
SELECT  
LASSO  
MOVE  
ZOOM  
STRAIGHTEN  
ANNOTATE  
Annotation Toolbox  
The Annotation toolbox allows you to add text and graphics to your  
cover page. Annotations are integral elements of the cover page. Unless  
you select to “hide them” by choosing the Hide Annotations command  
from the View menu, they are sent with the cover page, and can be  
printed, edited, and saved.  
SELECT, RECTANGLE, LINE, ELLIPSE, ARROW, POLYGON  
FREE DRAW, HIGHLIGHTER, TEXT, STAMP, STICKY NOTE  
Data Fields (Variables)  
The Data Fields list contains the fields of information you want to  
include on the fax cover page. When you use the cover page with the  
Desktop Manager, these fields are automatically filled in with the  
appropriate information for a specific fax transmission.  
Layout Area  
The layout area allows you to visually create and edit the features of your  
cover page. The size of the layout area corresponds to the size of a  
standard fax page. You can use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to  
view different portions of the cover page, as necessary.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a New Cover Page  
The following instructions summarize the overall procedures for  
creating a new fax cover page. Detailed procedures follow the summary.  
With the  
❍ A blank document page displays:  
MultiPASS Cover  
Page Designer  
open, choose the  
New command  
from the  
File menu.  
In the layout area,  
prepare your fax  
background.  
❍ Use the tools on the Annotation toolbox.  
•
Use the Text tool to add labels for variable data fields  
(such as To: and From:) or any other desired text  
Use the Stamp tool to add BMP formatted graphics  
(such as a company logo or signature).  
•
❍ Insert the data fields you want to include in the fax using  
the options available in the Data Fields list.  
❍ Position the fields at the desired locations on your  
background. Optionally, adjust the appearance of each  
field as necessary.  
4-34 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save the  
cover page.  
❍ When you have completed the cover page design, choose  
the Save command from the File menu or toolbar.  
❍ In the Enter Title for New Cover Page dialog box, enter a  
name for your cover page and click OK.  
Preparing the Cover Page Background  
The background includes the permanent text information and graphics  
you want included on the cover page. For example, you may want to  
include heading text that provides your company name and address  
information, labels for the variables fields (such as To: and From:), and  
one or more graphics that may represent your company logo or your  
signature.  
You can create a cover page background using the Cover Page Designer,  
you can create a background in another application (such as Word for  
®
Windows, Paint, or Photoshop ) and then import it as a TIFF file into  
the Cover Page Designer. Once imported, you can edit, annotate, and  
save the cover page just as if you originally created it in the Cover Page  
Designer.  
Importing a cover page background  
Create and save  
your cover page.  
❍ Create your cover page in the desired application.  
❍ Save it as a TIFF file.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
With the Cover  
Page Designer  
open, choose the  
Import command  
from the File  
menu.  
❍ You see a screen similar to this:  
❍ In the Select Image for New Cover Page dialog box, locate  
the cover page you want to import and click Open.  
❍ You can now edit and save the cover page as desired.  
Setting Preferences  
Before working on your cover page, you may want to set the following  
preferences in the Cover Page Designer to better suit your working  
needs:  
❍ Set the Unit of Measurement—On the File menu, click Preferences.  
Set the unit of measurement to Pixels, Inches, or Centimeters from  
the list and click OK.  
❍ Display Rulers—On the View menu, click Show Rulers.  
❍ Note the other settings that you can adjust to your working needs.  
4-36 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Labels and Text  
You may want to add labels for the data fields you will be using (such as  
To: or From:) or other text to your cover page using the Text tool from  
the Annotation toolbox. Once added, you can choose text attributes:  
font, font size and color, special effects (underline, strikeout),  
background color, and mode.  
When selecting a font, font size, a color, or special effect, keep in mind  
that it affects the entire text contained in the box. If you change any of  
the attributes while editing text, or while the text box is selected, it  
changes all the text in the box.  
Adding text to the cover page  
1. If not selected, click the Annotations button on the Image Toolbar.  
2. On the Annotations toolbox, click the Text tool and drag the cursor  
to draw an appropriately sized square or rectangle in the layout area.  
3. Enter the new text.  
4. Click the Select tool from the Annotations toolbox, then click the  
new text.  
5. Right-click inside the newly drawn square or rectangle to select the  
desired text adjustment options from the Annotations option.  
Click Select Font to set font properties for the text  
•
Click Set Background Color to set a background color  
•
Click Set Foreground Color to set a text color.  
•
6. Click outside the text box.  
7. On the File menu, click Save. The new text is added to the cover  
page.  
If this is the first time you have saved the cover page, the Enter Title for  
New Cover Page dialog box displays. Enter a name for your cover page  
and click OK.  
N
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing text added to a cover page  
1. On the Annotation toolbox, with the Selection tool selected, double-  
click the text you added. The cursor changes to an insertion point.  
2. Edit the text as needed.  
3. Click outside the area of the text box.  
4. On the File menu, click Save.  
Adding Graphics  
You can insert either a text or graphic image stamp on your cover page.  
The Desktop Manager contains a library of available stamp images,  
stored as BMP files, that were installed with the Desktop Manager  
software. Additionally, you can add special graphics (such as a company  
logo or personal signature) into the stamp library provided the graphic  
is saved in a BMP format.  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. In the Select Stamp dialog box, click Add. An Open dialog box  
displays.  
3. Locate the BMP file you wish to add to the Stamp library and click  
Open. If you have multiple graphics you want to add, repeat this  
step.  
4. Click the first graphic you want to insert into the cover page and  
click OK.  
4-38 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Click the Stamp tool on the Annotation toolbox.  
6. Click the mouse at the location where you want to place the graphic  
in the layout area.  
7. To add a different graphic to the cover page, choose the Select  
Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
8. Click the graphic you want to insert and click OK.  
9. Click the Stamp tool on the Annotation toolbox.  
10. Click the mouse at the location where you want to place the graphic  
in the layout area.  
11. Adjust the size and characteristics of the graphics as desired (see  
Modifying a Predefined Fax Cover Page on page 4-42.).  
12. On the File menu, click Save. The graphic is added to the cover page.  
Creating a text stamp  
You can also create and use a Text Stamp on your cover page.  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu. The  
Select Stamp dialog box displays.  
2. Click the Text Stamp tab.  
3. Click Add.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. In the Text Stamp Edit dialog box, type the text you wish to assign to  
the Stamp.  
To add a date to the stamp, click Date.  
•
To add the current time to the stamp, click Time.  
•
To change the font and text characteristics of the text, click Font.  
•
5. Click OK to close the Edit Text Stamp dialog box.  
6. Click OK again to save the text stamp and close the Select Stamp  
dialog box.  
Editing a text stamp  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. Click the Text Stamp tab.  
3. Click the stamp you want to edit, then click Edit.  
4. Modify the text and click OK.  
5. Click OK to close the Select Stamp dialog box.  
Removing an image or text stamp  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. Click the stamp you wish to remove, then click Delete. A  
confirmation message displays.  
3. Click Yes.  
4. Click OK to close the Select Stamp dialog box.  
Inserting a text stamp  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. Click the Text Stamp tab on the Select Stamp dialog box.  
3. Click the text stamp you wish to insert into the cover page and  
click OK.  
4. Click the mouse at the location where you want to place the text  
stamp in the layout area.  
4-40 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a Drawing Graphic  
You can also annotate your cover page with one or more drawing objects  
that include a straight line, a single-headed arrow, a hollow rectangle,  
and a hollow circle or ellipse. When you draw the object, you can select  
the color, line thickness, and style of line for the object.  
1. On the Annotation toolbox, click the drawing object tool:  
Arrow/Line, Rectangle, or Circle.  
2. From the Annotation menu, select the color, line thickness, and style  
of line for the object you are drawing. For an arrow or line, also  
select the particular style you want to use.  
3. At the desired location in the layout area, drag the cursor to draw  
the object. When you release the mouse button, the object is  
completed.  
4. From the File menu, click Save. The new graphic is added to the  
cover page.  
Adding Variable Data Fields  
You can insert variable fields that are filled in with actual data when you  
attach the cover page to a particular fax. You can choose any or all of the  
available fields, placing them at a desired location in the layout area.  
Fields are placed on top of any cover page background or imges. Each  
field displays sample text to illustrate the current font, font size, and text  
attributes. Actual data is added to the field when the fax is sent.  
Only the variable fields shown in the variables bin are available for you  
to use in the cover page. You cannot add or delete a field to or from the  
existing set. You also cannot use a single field more than once on a cover  
page.  
Inserting a field  
1. Click the desired data field on the Variables Bin.  
2. Drag the cursor to draw an appropriately sized square or rectangle  
in the layout area.  
3. Click the Selection tool from the Annotations toolbox, then click the  
new data field.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Right-click inside the newly drawn square or rectangle to select the  
desired text adjustment options from the Annotations option.  
Click Select Font to set font properties for the text.  
•
Click Set Background Color to set a background color.  
•
Click Set Foreground Color to set a text color.  
•
5. Click outside the text box.  
6. Align the data fields as desired (see Modifying a Predefined Fax Cover  
Page below.)  
7. On the File menu, click Save. The data fields are added to the cover  
page.  
Modifying a Predefined Fax Cover Page  
The following instructions summarize the basic procedures for  
modifying a predefined fax cover page. Detailed procedures follow this  
summary.  
1. With the Cover Page Designer open, choose the Open command  
from the File menu or toolbar. You see a screen similar to this:  
2. Highlight the desired fax cover name and click OK.  
3. With the cover page open in the Cover Page Designer, drag the  
information fields to the locations that you prefer; delete and/or add  
information fields.  
4-42 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. On the File menu, click Save or Save As.  
If you would like to keep the original page, use Save As to give  
the modified page a new distinct name.  
•
If you would like to replace the original cover page, use Save.  
•
Adjusting Text and Variable Fields  
Once you have placed the desired text labels and variable fields into the  
layout area, you can adjust the appearance of any text or data field. You  
can resize, move, or delete text or data fields. When you delete a data  
field, the field is removed from the layout area and returned to the  
variables bin.  
Additionally, you can set the text attributes for text or data fields and  
align two or more fields on the right, left, top, or bottom.  
❍ To select text or data field in the layout area:  
To select a single text box or data field, click the Select tool from  
the Annotations toolbox, then click the text box or data field.  
•
To select more than one text box or data field, hold down the  
Shift key and click the desired text and/or data fields.  
•
❍ To move text or data fields, drag the selected text box or data field to  
the new location.  
❍ To delete a text box or data field, select the text box or data field and  
press the Delete key.  
Resizing a field  
With the exception of the Memo field, most of the variable fields consist  
of a single line of text. If the variable information to be placed in the  
field is longer than the field size, the text does not automatically wrap  
onto the next line. Instead, the text is truncated to fit the length of the  
field. For this reason, you may want to resize fields to ensure that the full  
line of text is visible on the cover page when the fax is sent.  
Because the Memo field typically contains multiple text lines, this  
variable field does provide for automatic text wrapping. However, make  
sure the size of the Memo field is large enough to accommodate the  
length of memo text that you may enter in the Send Fax dialog box. If  
the Memo field is not large enough, not all the lines of a memo text may  
be visible when the fax cover page is sent.  
To resize the field, click the field and drag any sizing handle.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Fields  
If you want to copy a field or graphic item and paste it into another  
Windows application which supports a Paste option, you can do so  
using the Copy command. When you copy a field or graphic item, it is  
placed in the Cover Page Designer clipboard. From the clipboard, you  
can paste it into any Windows application that supports this command.  
1. Select the field/graphic element to be copied. Now choose the Copy  
command from the Edit menu or toolbar, or click the right mouse  
button and select Copy from the Edit menu.  
2. Open the Windows application where you want to paste the item.  
3. Paste the item into the Windows application (usually, by selecting  
the Paste command from the Edit menu or toolbar).  
Removing an Annotation  
If you decide you no longer want an item to apear in your cover page,  
you can remove it permanently by selecting it and pressing the Delete  
key.  
Adjusting the Orientation and View  
When creating or editing a cover page, you may want to adjust your view  
of it by rotating or flipping the page.  
From the Edit menu:  
❍ Click Rotate, then choose 90, 180 (flipping the document upside  
down), or 270.  
❍ Click Flip, then choose Horizontal or Vertical.  
4-44 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Straightening a Document Display  
In designing a cover page, you may need to straighten the base image  
(for example, a scan that is crooked) before you begin adding text or  
graphics to it. You can straighten a cover page using the Straighten Tools.  
1. Open the cover page in the Cover Page Designer. On the Image  
toolbar, click the Straighten button. A Straighten toolbar displays  
and crosshairs appear over the cover page.  
ROTATE  
STRAIGHTEN  
CLOCKWISE  
ROTATE  
COUNTERCLOCKWISE  
2. On the Straighten toolbar, click the Rotate Clockwise or Rotate  
Counterclockwise buttons until the cover page is evenly aligned in  
the crosshairs.  
3. Click the Straighten button.  
4. On the File menu, click Save.  
Adjusting the Display  
The Cover Page Designer provides you with different levels of  
magnification allowing you to work at the most comfortable size. You  
can zoom in and out at predefined increments, or specify a particular  
size or scale. You can also use the Fit Image to Window option, which  
adjusts the document image size so that the entire cover page is visible  
within the window.  
To zoom in or zoom out on the cover page, do one of the following:  
❍ From the View menu, click Zoom, then select the desired level of  
magnification.  
❍ From the File toolbar, select the desired level of magnification from  
the list.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ From the Image toolbar, click the Zoom tool and:  
To increase magnification, click the document.  
•
To decrease magnification, press and hold the Alt key, then click  
the document.  
•
To fit the cover page to the display window, click Fit Image to Window  
from the View menu.  
Scrolling through a Zoomed Cover Page  
If you need to work on particular aspects of a cover page (for example,  
to modify a recurring graphic), you can scroll through the cover page  
while maintaining a high level of magnification. To do this, you use the  
Navigator and Scroll tools.  
1. From the View menu, click Show Navigator. The Navigator window  
opens in the right corner of the screen. Inside the Navigator, a white  
rectangle indicates the area of your cover page that is currently in  
view.  
2. On the Image toolbar, click the Move button. The cursor turns into  
a hand.  
3. While tracking your position in the Navigator window, click and  
hold the left mouse button and drag the image to bring the desired  
area of the cover page into view.  
4-46 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the Base Image  
While working with a cover page, you may need to edit the base image  
that underlies all annotations. When editing a base image, you can select,  
crop, or flip a specific area. For example, to create a novel effect, you may  
want to flip an imbedded graphic on its vertical or horizontal axis.  
Selecting an area of a cover page  
1. On the Image toolbar, choose either the Select or Lasso tool.  
Use the Select tool for areas that fit easily inside a square or  
rectangle.  
•
Use the Lasso tool for irregularly shaped areas.  
•
2. Drag the cursor to draw the appropriately shaped container for the  
area you want to select.  
Cropping a cover page  
1. Select the area of the cover page to which you want the entire cover  
page to conform.  
2. Choose Crop Inplace from the Edit menu or File toolbar.  
Flipping a cover page  
❍ To flip the entire cover page, select Flip from the Edit menu, then  
choose Horizontal or Vertical.  
❍ To flip a selected area of a cover page.  
Select an area of the cover page.  
•
Select Flip from the Edit menu, then choose Horizontal or  
Vertical.  
•
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Text Attributes  
Once you have placed text labels and fields in the layout area, you can  
change the font and font size of the text, choose a text style (bold, italic,  
underline), or change the font color. If you have multiple fields to which  
you want to assign the same attributes, you can select the fields together  
and make the change to all the selected fields at once.  
1. In the layout area, select the label(s) or field(s) you want to change.  
2. Choose the Select Font command from the Annotation menu. You  
see a screen similar to this:  
3. Choose the appropriate text attributes (notice that a sample of your  
selections is displayed in the Sample box):  
Select the font and font size from their appropriate list boxes.  
•
Select Italic, Bold, or Italic Bold from the Font Style list box.  
•
Select Strikeout and/or Underline from the Effects options.  
•
4. Click OK to apply the settings.  
4-48 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Text Color  
1. In the layout area, select the field(s) you want to change.  
2. Choose the Foreground Color command from the Annotation  
menu, then choose the desired color.  
Aligning Fields  
When placing labels, graphics, or variable fields in the layout area, you  
may be concerned that they properly align, to make them more visually  
appealing. You can align two or more selected fields, based on the  
position of the first field you select. The first field selected in the set of  
fields to be aligned is the anchor for the alignment.  
You can align fields, based on the first selected field, by their top,  
bottom, left, right, horizontal center, or vertical center locations.  
1. Select the two or more fields you want to align.  
2. Choose the Align command from the Annotation menu, then select  
the desired align option.  
Adding Additional Annotations to Your Cover Page  
The following sections describe additional ways in which you can  
annotate your cover page.  
Adding a Sticky-Note Annotation  
Rather than add text directly to a cover page, as you do with the Text  
tool, you can add a Sticky-Note on any portion of your cover page as a  
graphic element.  
When you add a Sticky-Note, you can choose the text attributes: font,  
font size and color, background color, and special effects (underline,  
strikeout).  
You can type any text that you want for the Sticky-Note, editing the note  
later if necessary. If you select a font, font size, a color, or special effect, it  
affects the entire note. If you change any of the attributes while editing a  
note, or while the note is selected, it changes all the text in the note.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a sticky-note  
1. In the Annotations toolbox, click the Sticky-Note tool and drag the  
cursor to draw an appropriately sized square or rectangle.  
2. Click the Selection tool, then click the Sticky-Note.  
3. Select the desired adjustment options from the Annotations menu.  
Click Select Font to set font properties for the text.  
•
Click Set Background Color to set a background color for the  
note.  
•
4. Type the text of your note.  
5. To add the Sticky-Note to your cover page, click outside its borders.  
Editing the text in a sticky-note  
1. On the Annotations toolbox, with the Selection tool selected,  
double-click the Sticky-Note. The cursor changes to an insertion  
point.  
2. Edit the text as needed.  
3. Click outside the area of the Sticky-Note.  
4. On the File menu, click Save.  
Highlighting Your Document  
You can add a color highlight to text or other images in your cover page.  
To do this, select a color and then draw a rectangular highlight over the  
desired area. All highlight colors are transparent and display in the color  
you specify. When you print the document, the highlighted region prints  
as gray shadings.  
1. On the Annotations toolbox, click the Highlighter tool.  
2. To select a highlighting background color, choose the Background  
Color command from the Annotation menu, then select the desired  
color.  
3. Drag the cursor over the area you want to highlight. When you  
release the mouse button, the highlight is completed.  
4-50 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reverting to the Last Saved Version  
If you are dissatisfied with changes that you have made to your cover  
page, you can discard them and return to the last saved version.  
To revert to the last version, choose the Revert to Original command  
from the File menu. When the confirmation message displays, click Yes.  
Renaming a Cover Page  
You can rename a cover page at any time in the Desktop Manager.  
1. Choose the Cover Pages command from the Tools menu, then select  
Manage Cover Pages.  
2. In the Manage Cover Page List dialog box, highlight the cover page  
you want to rename and click Rename.  
Chapter 4  
Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500 4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. In the Rename dialog box, type the new name for the cover page and  
click OK.  
4. Click OK to close the Manage Cover Page List dialog box and save  
your changes.  
Printing a Cover Page  
You can print your cover page to review it.  
1. Choose the Print command from the File menu or toolbar.  
2. In the Print dialog box, specify the desired print options and click  
OK.  
Deleting a Cover Page  
You can delete a cover page that you no longer need from the Desktop  
Manager.  
1. Choose the Cover Pages command from the Tools menu, then select  
Manage Cover Pages. The Manage Cover Page List dialog box  
displays.  
2. Highlight the cover page you want to delete and click Delete. A  
confirmation message displays.  
3. Click Yes to delete the cover page.  
4. Click OK to close the Manage Cover Page List dialog box and save  
your changes.  
4-52 Sending Faxes With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Faxes  
5
The MultiPASS C3500 has four Receive Modes:  
❍ Fax Only Mode  
❍ Fax/Tel Mode  
❍ Manual Mode  
❍ Answer Machine Mode  
You set the Receive Mode during the MultiPASS installation procedure.  
(See your Quick Start Guide for details.)  
You can change the Receive Mode and the Receive Fax options through  
the MultiPASS Desktop Manager. See page 8-7 for details.  
Receiving Documents  
During reception of a fax:  
❍ If the unit runs out of paper or if the BJ cartridge runs out of ink,  
the MultiPASS receives the remainder of the document in memory.  
❍ To stop receiving before the document is complete, press STOP.  
Then press to cancel reception.  
*
❍ If the ALARM light is flashing for any reason, correct the error and  
then press STOP. If necessary, see Chapter 10, Troubleshooting.  
❍ If an error occurs, the MultiPASS beeps intermittently for a few  
seconds. If this happens, contact the other party and have them  
resend the document.  
Chapter 5  
Receiving Faxes 5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents Automatically—Fax Only Mode  
When you set up the MultiPASS for a dedicated fax line, the unit is  
prepared to automatically receive a document whenever a call comes  
over the fax line. If a voice call comes in, the caller will hear the fax tone.  
Receiving Both Documents and Telephone Calls  
Automatically—Fax/Tel Mode  
In Fax/Tel Mode, the MultiPASS monitors all incoming calls over the  
telephone line. When the MultiPASS receives an incoming call, it checks  
to see if the call is from another fax machine trying to send a document  
or from someone wanting to talk to you. You must have a telephone  
connected to the MultiPASS to use this mode.  
How Fax/Tel Mode Works  
In Fax/Tel Mode, a telephone attached to the MultiPASS will not ring  
when it receives a call from another fax machine that is trying to send a  
document. This is so that you are not disturbed when your MultiPASS  
is communicating with another fax machine. The unit automatically  
receives the document.  
If the call is from a person, the MultiPASS rings to alert you to pick up  
the phone. You must pick up the telephone connected to the MultiPASS.  
If you do not pick up the telephone connected to the MultiPASS within  
15 seconds (set by the Ring Time option), the unit stops ringing. It  
checks again to make sure the call is not from a fax machine and then  
hangs up.  
The MultiPASS does not recognize an extension telephone connected to  
another phone jack (that is, not connected to the MultiPASS).  
N
If a call comes in and you pick up an extension phone, the telephone  
connected to the MultiPASS will continue to ring for 15 seconds, check  
for a fax, and then hang up.  
5-2 Receiving Faxes  
Chapter 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents Manually—Manual Mode  
You will want to set your MultiPASS to receive documents manually  
when you want to personally check each incoming call to see if it is from  
a fax or from a person. You must have a telephone attached to the  
MultiPASS.  
When the telephone attached to the MultiPASS rings, pick up the  
telephone.  
❍ If you hear a person’s voice, start your conversation. If the caller  
wants to send a document after talking to you, confirm that the  
document is loaded and request that the caller press the START  
button. Wait on the line until you hear a slow beep or silence  
(depending on the sending fax unit), then press START/COPY to  
receive the document.  
❍ If you hear a slow beep or silence, another fax is trying to send you a  
document. Press START/COPY.  
Your MultiPASS begins receiving the document.  
❍ Hang up the telephone after the MultiPASS displays RECEIVE. If you  
don’t hang up, the MultiPASS beeps intermittently for a few seconds  
after you receive the document. To disable the beeping, turn off the  
Off Hook Alarm option in the Advanced: Send Fax dialog box. (See  
page 8-5 for details.)  
Using the Telephone for Remote Reception of a Fax  
If you pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the MultiPASS  
and you hear a fax tone, you can start receiving the document manually  
by entering a two-digit ID code from the phone. This is particularly  
convenient if you are using a cordless phone and you answer the phone  
away from the MultiPASS.  
To use this feature, the telephone must be plugged into the telephone  
jack of the MultiPASS (see your Quick Start Guide for details). The  
Remote Receive option must be enabled in the Advanced: Receive Fax  
dialog box. (The default is enabled.) For details, see page 8-9.  
Chapter 5  
Receiving Faxes 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use the telephone to receive manual calls as follows:  
1. When you answer a call and hear a long beep or silence, a fax is  
being sent.  
2. Enter the two-digit ID code on your telephone (the default code is  
25). Wait for five seconds, then hang up. The MultiPASS then begins  
receiving the document.  
If you have an answering machine connected to your MultiPASS and  
you can control your answering machine from a remote telephone, make  
sure the security code for this function is different than the two-digit ID  
code described above. You change the two-digit ID code used by the  
MultiPASS to make it distinct from the answering machine’s security  
code. See page 8-11.  
N
Using an Answering Machine—Ans. Machine Mode  
Connecting an answering machine to the MultiPASS allows you to  
receive faxes and phone messages while you are out of the office.  
In Answer Machine Mode, the MultiPASS allows the answering machine  
to answer incoming calls, then listens for a fax tone or for four seconds  
of silence (also an indication that a fax is coming in), and automatically  
receives the fax if it detects the tone or a four-second silence. (Four  
seconds is the default; you can change this value.)  
Canon does not recommend using an “answering service” (like those  
offered by local telephone companies that provide voice mail) on the  
N
telephone line you are connecting to the MultiPASS. If you do subscribe  
to an answering service, you may want to dedicate a separate line for fax  
communication only and connect that line to the MultiPASS. Or, you  
can see if your telephone company offers a Distinctive Ring Pattern  
(DRP) service (see page 5-9 for details).  
5-4 Receiving Faxes  
Chapter 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the MultiPASS With an Answering Machine  
Follow these guidelines when using the MultiPASS with an answering  
machine:  
❍ Set the answering machine to answer on the first or second ring.  
❍ If the MultiPASS runs out of paper or ink in Answer Machine Mode,  
it receives all faxes into its memory. The faxes then print  
automatically when you add paper or replace the BJ cartridge.  
❍ When recording the outgoing message on the answering machine:  
The entire message must be no more than 15 seconds long.  
•
•
In the message, tell your callers how to send a fax. For example:  
“Hello. I can’t answer the phone right now, but please leave a  
message after the beep. I’ll return your call as soon as possible. If  
you would like to send a fax, press the start button on your fax  
machine after you leave your message. Thank you.”  
Printing Documents Received in Memory  
If one of the following errors occurs while the MultiPASS is receiving  
a document, the unit stores the document in memory:  
❍ BJ cartridge runs out of ink  
❍ BJ cartridge is not installed  
❍ Sheet feeder runs out of paper  
❍ Paper jam occurs  
The MultiPASS can store up to 42 letter-size pages (based on the CCITT  
No. 1 chart) or 20 separate documents.  
The LCD display shows REC’D IN MEMORY alternating with the error  
message when the memory contains documents. The MultiPASS will  
automatically print the contents of memory when you correct the  
problem and press the STOP button.  
Chapter 5  
Receiving Faxes 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After printing the document(s) stored in memory, the MultiPASS erases  
the document(s) from memory.  
If you are using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager and it is set to Save in  
memory, the MultiPASS stores incoming faxes in its memory when the  
N
computer is off. In this case, you will see the  
message. See  
REC’D IN FILE  
Receiving Faxes to The MultiPASS Desktop Manager below for details.  
Receiving While Copying, Printing,  
or Registering  
Because the MultiPASS supports multitasking, you can receive a  
document or a phone call while you are:  
❍ Making a copy  
❍ Printing a document  
❍ Entering information  
If you are making copies or printing a document and the MultiPASS  
receives a fax, it stores the document in its memory. It then prints the  
document as soon as you finish making copies or printing. If you are  
entering information into the LCD menu system and the MultiPASS  
receives a fax, it prints the document immediately (it does not store  
the document in memory).  
Receiving Faxes to the MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager  
When your computer is on, you can automatically receive incoming  
faxes to the MultiPASS Desktop Manager.  
When your computer is off, the MultiPASS stores received faxes in its  
memory until you either print them or you turn on the computer. When  
you turn on the computer, you can send the faxes to the MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager.  
The MultiPASS can also print incoming faxes directly. If your computer  
is going to be off for a while and you are expecting incoming faxes, it’s a  
good idea to set the MultiPASS to automatically print incoming faxes.  
5-6 Receiving Faxes  
Chapter 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving a Fax Into the In Box  
To receive a fax into the In Box of the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, your  
computer must be on and the MultiPASS Server must be running. You  
must also have selected Upload Fax in the Receive Conditions of the  
Desktop Manager. (See page 8-8 for details.)  
The Receive Conditions determine how your faxes are received by the  
MultiPASS.  
❍ When Computer is Off  
Set this to Print Fax to always print an incoming fax.  
•
Set this to Save in memory to save an incoming fax in the  
•
MultiPASS’s memory. You can then print the fax, or upload  
it to the MultiPASS Desktop Manager after you turn on the  
computer.  
❍ When Computer is On  
Set this to Upload Fax to receive all your faxes to the  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager.  
•
Set this to Print Fax to always print an incoming fax.  
•
Chapter 5  
Receiving Faxes 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a Received Fax When Your Computer Is Off  
When a document is in its memory, the MultiPASS displays the message  
REC’D IN FILE and alternately flashes the date.  
To upload the fax to the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, simply turn on  
the computer.  
If you want to print a fax that is stored in memory in the MultiPASS  
without turning on the computer, follow these steps:  
On the MultiPASS,  
FUNCTION  
press the  
FUNCTION key.  
Press < or > on  
FILE PRINT  
the one-touch  
speed dialing  
keypad.  
The MultiPASS begins printing the  
document.  
Press START/COPY.  
Once the MultiPASS prints a fax, it erases the fax from its memory.  
N
5-8 Receiving Faxes  
Chapter 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) Feature  
Some phone companies offer a distinctive ring pattern (DRP) service  
whereby they assign two or more telephone numbers with distinctive  
ring patterns to a single telephone line. If your phone company offers  
such a service, you can have both a fax number(s) and a telephone  
number(s) for your MultiPASS using only one telephone line.  
Your MultiPASS will automatically detect incoming calls. Based on the  
distinctive ring pattern, the MultiPASS knows if the call is from a fax  
machine trying to send a document or from a telephone trying to make  
a voice call.  
Use the information in this section to set up the MultiPASS for use with  
a DRP service. For more details on the DRP service, contact your local  
telephone company. (Your telephone company may have a different  
name for this service. Also, this service may not be offered in all areas.)  
Types of Ring Patterns  
Your telephone company will assign a distinctive ring pattern to each  
number when you order the DRP service. The setting you make in the  
MultiPASS must match the setting assigned by the telephone company.  
You can set the MultiPASS for the following ring patterns:  
❍ Normal ring—Ring type of normal telephone line  
(Recommended for voice calls)  
❍ Double ring—Two short rings at regular intervals  
(Recommended for fax calls)  
❍ Triple ring—Short-short-long at regular intervals  
❍ Triple ring—Short-long-short at regular intervals  
❍ Other ring type—Patterns other than those described above  
You set the DRPD Switch Options in the Advanced: Receive Fax dialog  
box (see page 8-11 for details).  
You must set all DRPD ring numbers in the MultiPASS. You select the  
ring pattern and then specify whether the pattern is for telephone calls,  
faxes, or both (fax/tel switching). See the next section for details.  
Chapter 5  
Receiving Faxes 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How DRPD Responds to Calls  
When there is an incoming call, the MultiPASS checks the incoming  
ring pattern and determines the type of pattern being received. The  
MultiPASS may require up to 10 seconds to determine the pattern type.  
During this time, any telephone device connected to the MultiPASS will  
not ring. After the pattern is detected, the MultiPASS reacts according to  
how you registered the setting.  
Incoming Call  
From Fax  
Incoming Call  
From Telephone  
Your Setting  
Fax  
Receives the fax document Answers as a fax  
without ringing.  
machine.  
Tel  
Rings to alert you to pick  
up the telephone. Press  
Rings to alert you to pick  
up the telephone and  
START/COPY to receive the take the call.  
fax (Manual Mode).  
Fax/Tel  
Switches to receive mode  
Rings to alert you to pick  
for fax transmission signals up the telephone and  
and does not ring.  
take the call.  
Communicating Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection (DRPD) Feature  
Using the MultiPASS with a DRP service is almost the same  
as using it with a normal telephone line.  
When you turn on DRPD, the Receive Mode defaults to Fax/Tel Mode.  
(You cannot change this Receive Mode.)  
When someone calls using the number assigned for telephone  
communication, the MultiPASS rings in the pattern you registered  
for telephone calls. When you hear this pattern, simply pick up the  
telephone connected to the MultiPASS and talk. If you do not pick up  
the telephone, the MultiPASS continues to ring until the other party  
hangs up.  
When someone sends a fax using the number assigned for fax  
communication, the MultiPASS does not ring. It receives the  
document automatically.  
5-10 Receiving Faxes  
Chapter 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning With the  
MultiPASS C3500  
6
You can use the MultiPASS C3500 to scan documents from the Desktop  
Manager, or from any TWAIN-compliant Windows application.  
When you scan a document in the Desktop Manager, the ScanGear  
window displays, allowing you to set certain scanning options and  
conditions. This chapter provides instructions on setting scan options  
using the ScanGear window.  
When you scan a document in a Windows application, the application  
may or may not display the ScanGear window. If the ScanGear window  
is not displayed, see the documentation for the Windows application  
you are working in for instructions on setting scan options.  
Typically, when you scan a document using the ScanGear window, you  
first scan a preview of the document. The preview image allows you to  
review the results of your scanned document and make any necessary  
adjustments (for example, to size, contrast, and so on). When you are  
satisfied with the results, you then perform the final scan of the  
document. The system then places the final image into the Desktop  
Manager or your Windows application.  
This chapter describes:  
❍ Exploring the ScanGear window  
❍ Scanning with the Desktop Manager  
❍ Scanning from a Windows application  
❍ Setting the preview scan options  
❍ Adjusting the preview image for the final scan  
Chapter 6  
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500 6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exploring the ScanGear Window  
This section provides an overview of the basics of the ScanGear window.  
Detailed instructions for using the various commands and components  
of the window are provided in later sections of this chapter.  
The ScanGear window looks similar to this:  
TOOLBAR  
SCAN OPTIONS  
TABS  
PREVIEW  
AREA  
STATUS BAR  
Toolbar  
The toolbar provides buttons for performing certain tasks when  
scanning. In circumstances where a task is unavailable, the button  
on the toolbar appears dim.  
MOVE  
IMAGE  
NEGATIVE/  
POSITIVE  
CLEAR  
PREVIEW  
ROTATE  
LEFT  
RULERS  
HELP  
CROP  
ZOOM  
TOOL  
MIRROR  
ROTATE  
RIGHT  
AUTO  
TONE  
Preview Area  
The preview area displays a preview image of the document you scan. A  
preview image enables you to adjust various document characteristics  
before you perform the final scan. For example, you can make  
adjustments to the size, the orientation, or the tone of the image.  
6-2 Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Option Tabs  
The Scan Option tabs provide adjustment options when performing a  
preview or final scan.  
Status Bar  
The status bar displays information on the scan process status. This  
information can include the scan mode, scan resolution, size (width and  
height), and the resulting file size of the scanned image.  
Displaying Information About the Scan Driver  
You can display version and copyright information about the scan driver  
using the About dialog box.  
1. On the title bar in the ScanGear window, click the right mouse  
button.  
2. On the displayed menu, click About ScanGear.  
3. To close the dialog box, click OK.  
Scanning With the Desktop Manager  
You can use the MultiPASS and the Desktop Manager to scan an image.  
The resulting document is displayed in the Desktop Manager and is  
automatically provided with a unique system-assigned name. You can  
rename the document later as desired.  
Each image you scan is placed into the Scan folder as a TIFF document.  
A scanned document remains in the Scan folder until you move it or  
delete it. A scanned document can be reviewed, annotated, printed, or  
sent as a fax. For more information on these tasks, refer to Chapter 7,  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager.  
The following instructions summarize the overall procedures for  
scanning an image. Detailed instructions follow later in this chapter.  
1. Place the image you want to scan face down in the ADF (automatic  
document feeder) of the MultiPASS.  
2. In the Desktop Manager, select the Scan command from the Tools  
menu or toolbar.  
Chapter 6  
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. In the ScanGear window, specify the scan preview options for your  
document as necessary.  
4. Click Preview.  
5. Review the display of the scanned preview image in the scan  
window. Adjust the properties of your image as necessary.  
6. Replace your document in the document feeder of the MultiPASS.  
7. Click Scan.  
An indicator displays showing you the progress of the scan. Once  
complete, the image is stored in the Scan folder, where it remains  
until you move or delete it.  
Scanning From a Windows Application  
You can use the MultiPASS to scan documents directly into a Windows  
application that supports a TWAIN interface (such as Photoshop). Some  
applications allow multiple page scans, while others do not. If you are  
unsure whether your Windows aplication supports this feature, refer to  
the user documentation for the application you are using.  
The following instructions summarize the general procedures for  
scanning an image. For specific information on scanning with your  
Windows application and specifying MultiPASS as the scan device, refer  
to the user documentation for the application you are using.  
1. Place the image you want to scan face down in the ADF (automatic  
document feeder) of the MultiPASS.  
2. In your Windows application, choose the command to scan a  
document.  
In some applications, the appropriate command may be listed as  
Acquire or Acquire Image.  
3. In the ScanGear window, specify the preview scan options for your  
document as necessary.  
4. Click Preview.  
5. Review the display of your scanned preview image. Adjust the  
properties of the image as necessary.  
6-4 Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Replace your document in the ADF of the MultiPASS.  
7. Click Scan.  
When complete, the image appears in the display area of your Windows  
application.  
Setting the Preview Scan Options  
Before previewing a scan, set the scan mode, resolution, preferences, and  
paper size options. Additionally, when you are scanning a black and  
white image, you can select one of the two black and white options.  
Setting the Scan Mode  
For a preview image, you specify how your source image will be  
acquired.  
1. Click the Main tab.  
2. From the Scan Mode list, select the desired option.  
Your options include the following:  
Grayscale  
Grayscale images contain 8 bits per pixel.  
Text Enhanced  
Text enhanced images are grayscale images (8 bits per pixel) converted to  
black and white (1 bit per pixel) using Canon ImageTrust technology.  
Black and White  
Black and white images are scanned at one bit per pixel. For applications  
that request a black and white scan and do not use the scan driver  
window, the scan driver automatically uses the Text Enhanced setting.  
Chapter 6  
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Scan Resolution  
You can set the resolution of a scanned image based on the selected  
output device. This resolution becomes the base on which changes to  
image size and scale are calculated. You can choose a preset resolution,  
or create a custom resolution.  
1. Click the Main tab.  
2. In the Scan Resolution list, select the desired option.  
Creating a Custom Resolution  
You can define a custom resolution, change an existing custom  
resolution, or delete a previously defined custom resolution.  
1. From the Scan Resolution list, select Custom.  
2. In the Custom Resolutions dialog box, type a name for your custom  
resolution setting.  
3. In the Resolution box, enter the preferred dpi setting.  
4. Click Add. The new resolution name displays in the Resolution List.  
5. Click OK to add the resolution setting.  
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without adding the custom  
resolution.  
•
You can delete (Remove) or change (Replace) a custom resolution  
setting at anytime.  
6-6 Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Preferences  
You can select a preference that governs how your source image is  
scanned using the Preferences tab. On the Preferences tab, click the  
desired preference checkbox.  
Text Enhanced  
This option is designed for use with OCR (Optical Character  
Recognition) software. This setting increases the contrast in black and  
white scanning to promote the accurate recognition of characters in  
OCR software. Resolution should be at least 300 dpi for OCR scans.  
For applications that request a black and white scan and do not use the  
scan window (including most OCR applications), the text enhanced  
setting is automatically used.  
The Color Matching options are not available.  
N
Chapter 6  
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Paper Size  
Select a paper size that corresponds to the size of your source document.  
If your document does not conform to one of the available sizes, you  
can define a custom paper size.  
Selecting a Standard Paper Size  
1. Click the C3500 tab.  
2. From the Paper Size list, select the desired option.  
Setting a Custom Paper Size  
1. Click the C3500 tab.  
2. In the Paper Size list, select Custom.  
3. In the Units list, select the unit of measure by which you want to  
define your custom size.  
4. In the Width and Length text boxes, enter the dimensions of your  
source document.  
6-8 Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Black and White Options  
If you choose black and white as your scan mode, you can also select one  
of the following black and white options from the C3500 tab:  
Threshold  
The Threshold option provides a high contrast evaluation of the image  
in terms of blacks and whites only.  
Halftone  
The Halftone option simulates the tonal range of an image with a  
precise pattern of lines and dots.  
1. Click the C3500 Tab.  
2. In the Black & White Options list, choose Threshold or Halftone.  
Adjusting the Preview Image for Final Scan  
Once an image has been previewed, you can adjust it, as necessary, for  
the final scan by changing its selection size, its output size, and aspects  
of its orientation.  
Clearing the Preview Area  
If the preview image does not serve your purpose, you can quickly  
remove it from the preview area and rescan the image.  
On the toolbar, click Clear Preview.  
Chapter 6  
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Preview Image View  
To make it easier to work with your preview image, you can change  
aspects of its display.  
Changing the View Size  
You can enlarge a preview image to better view its details. Each  
enlargement doubles the size of the image up to a maximum of four  
times the size of the original image.  
As you enlarged the image, you can just as easily reduce it. Each  
reduction decreases the size of the image by one-half.  
1. On the toolbar, click Zoom.  
2. To enlarge, left-click the mouse pointer on the image.  
To reduce, right-click the mouse pointer on the image.  
Displaying Rulers  
To work precisely with a preview image, you can display rulers on the  
top and left borders of the preview area. The rulers display in inches or  
centimeters, depending on what you have set as the unit of measure on  
the Main tab.  
On the toolbar, click Rulers.  
Adjusting the Selection Size  
When you first preview an image, the selection size is the same as your  
source document paper size.  
You can adjust the selection size of an image in order to isolate a specific  
area of the image for a more restrictive preview scan. For example, in  
scanning a letter, you may want to isolate and save a company logo by  
itself, ignoring the rest of the letter.  
You define the selection size of your image by drawing a border around  
the part of the image that you would like to isolate. Alternatively, you  
can define and orient the dimensions of the selection with respect to the  
upper left corner of the preview area. Regardless of how you define a  
selection, you can easily and quickly change its dimensions.  
6-10 Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In defining the selection size, regardless of the method you choose, you  
can maintain the current height and width proportions of the image.  
For example, you set the width to 4 inches and the height to 6 inches.  
You change the width to 5 inches. If Keep Proportions is not selected,  
the height stays at 6 inches. Thus, the proportion of the page height and  
width changes. If Keep Proportions is selected when you change the  
width, the height automatically changes to 7.53 inches. The lock icon  
indicates that the page size will be maintained in the same proportion  
whenever you change either the width or the height.  
1. Click the Main tab.  
2. If you want to preserve the current proportions of the image, click  
the Keep Proportions button.  
KEEP PROPORTIONS  
3. To draw the selected area, click Crop on the toolbar and drag the  
mouse diagonally across the area of the image in the preview  
window you want to select. The Width and Height text boxes display  
the new sizes.  
4. To further define the dimensions of the selected area, in the Width  
and Height text boxes, type the appropriate values. The image  
selection borders change to match the specified width and height.  
5. If you want to select an entirely different area of the image, click  
outside the crop lines to clear the current selection.  
6. To preview the newly selected image area, click Preview.  
Moving an Image  
If the image is too large to see in its entirety, you can move the image  
within the preview area to locate a relevant section.  
On the toolbar, click Move Image and drag the zoomed image to display  
the appropriate area or detail.  
Chapter 6  
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reversing the Image Tone  
You can create a negative of an image for stylistic effect. A negative  
image is created by inverting the dark and light areas.  
On the toolbar, click Negative/Positive.  
Mirroring an Image  
By mirroring an image, you can create an alternate version. For example,  
you can create an alternate version of your company logo.  
On the toolbar, click Mirror.  
Rotating an Image  
You can rotate an image 90° left or right within the preview area to  
change its orientation. When you rotate an image, the entire preview  
area, including the rulers, rotates. For example, if the preview area is in  
portrait orientation, it becomes landscape.  
On the toolbar, click Rotate Left or Rotate Right.  
Scaling the Image Output Size  
You can scale the preview image to better fit your needs by saving it as a  
data file. For example, if you reduce by 50% the scale of an image that is  
7 inches wide by 9 inches high, the output image will be 3.5 inches wide  
by 4.5 inches high.  
However, in scaling an image for the final scan, keep in mind that the  
values in the width and height text boxes remain the same.  
1. Click the Main tab.  
2. In the Scale box, enter a new percent.  
The new output size is displayed under Output Size.  
6-12 Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Contrast and Brightness  
You can adjust the contrast and/or brightness of a grayscale image.  
1. Click the C3500 tab.  
2. On the C3500 tab, under Black and White Options, use the available  
slider to adjust the brightness or contrast.  
If you use halftone as your scan option, you can adjust both the  
contrast or brightness of the image.  
•
Chapter 6  
Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you use threshold as your scan option, since it is by definition  
a high contrast image mode, you can only adjust the brightness  
of the preview image.  
•
6-14 Scanning With the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Working With Documents  
in the Desktop Manager  
This chapter contains information and instructions for managing,  
manipulating, and modifying your documents in the MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager. It includes:  
❍ Managing your documents in the Desktop Manager  
❍ Modifying a document  
❍ Printing a document  
❍ Adjusting the MultiPASS viewer default options  
Managing Your Documents in the  
Desktop Manager  
Once you send a PC fax, receive a fax, or scan an image, the resulting  
document is available in the Desktop Manager. You can perform a  
variety of tasks with your documents, as described in this chapter.  
Selecting Documents in the Desktop Manager  
To work with a document, you select it in the open folder, while in either  
Document View or List View. If you are in Document View, generally  
you can select one or more documents at a time for whatever task you  
need to perform.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting a Document in Document View  
With the folder open, do one of the following.  
❍ For a single document, click the document thumbnail.  
❍ For multiple nonsequential documents, hold the Ctrl key while  
clicking on each document you want to select.  
Selecting a Document in List View  
With the folder open, click the document name in the list.  
7-2 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a Document in the Desktop Manager  
You can print a document from any folder in the Desktop Manager.  
1. In either Document View or List View, do one of the following.  
Click the document you want to print; this highlights the  
•
document. Then, choose the Print command from the File  
menu.  
Drag the document to the Print button on the Process toolbar.  
•
2. In the Print dialog box, make sure the Canon MultiPASS C3500  
Printer is selected, and click OK.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a Folder  
To better organize your documents in the Desktop Manager, you can  
create additional folders when needed and store them in the Cabinet.  
Like creating any Windows folder, you can name the folder anything  
you like.  
1. In the Desktop Manager, click the Cabinet, or if you want to store  
a folder within a folder, click the applicable folder.  
2. Choose the New Folder command from the File menu.  
3. In the Create Folder dialog box, enter a name of your new folder  
and click OK.  
Moving a Document  
You can move a document from:  
❍ A system-defined folder to a user-defined folder  
❍ A system-defined folder or user-defined folder to the Trash folder  
❍ One user-defined folder to another user-defined folder  
You cannot move a document into a system-defined folder other than  
the Trash folder.  
1. In either Document View or List View, open the folder containing  
the document you want to move.  
2. Drag the document to the desired folder.  
In Document View, the document is placed in the first available grid  
space. In List View, the document is placed in the appropriate sort order.  
7-4 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying a Document  
A document can be copied within the same user-defined folder, or  
from one folder to a different user-defined folder. When you copy a  
document within the same folder, the copy is assigned the same name as  
the original document, with an added unique number. For example, if  
you copy a document called Document 1, the new copy will be named  
Document 2.  
Copying a Document Within the Same  
User-defined Folder  
1. Open the folder with the document you want to copy.  
2. Click the document to highlight it, then click the Duplicate button  
on the Document toolbar, or choose the Duplicate command  
from the Edit menu. Or, right-click on the document and select  
Duplicate.  
Copying a Document From One Folder to Another  
1. Open the folder with the document you want to copy.  
2. Drag the document, while holding down the Ctrl key, to the desired  
folder.  
Renaming a Document or Folder  
You can rename a user-defined folder or a document at any time. Folder  
names must be unique within the Desktop Manager. Document names  
must be unique within a folder.  
Whenever you attempt to rename a folder or document, the system  
verifies whether the new name is unique. In the event of a conflict, the  
system alerts you of the conflict. A folder or document name can  
contain blank spaces.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To rename a document, do one of the following.  
❍ Click the document, then choose the Rename command from the  
File menu, or click the right mouse button and choose Rename. In  
the Rename dialog box, type the new name and click OK.  
❍ In Document View, click the document thumbnail. Then click  
the document name to position the insertion point. Using the  
Backspace and Delete keys, edit the name of the document as  
desired.  
To rename a folder, do one of the following.  
❍ Click the folder. Then, on the File menu, click Rename. In the  
Rename dialog box, enter the new name and click OK.  
❍ Right-click on the folder and select Rename. Enter the new name in  
the Rename dialog box and click OK.  
❍ Click the folder name. Enter the new name in the highlighted  
rectangle.  
You cannot rename a system-defined folder.  
Deleting a Document or Folder  
You can delete a document or user-defined folder when it is no longer  
needed.  
When you delete a document, it moves to the Trash folder. To  
permanently delete a document(s), you must empty the Trash folder.  
When you delete a folder, it is removed from the Desktop Manager  
window immediately and permanently deleted. You don’t have to empty  
the trash to permanently delete folders.  
7-6 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Document  
Open the folder with the document you want to delete and click the  
document, then do one of the following.  
❍ Choose the Delete command from the Edit menu.  
❍ Press the Delete key on your keyboard.  
❍ Click the right mouse button and choose Delete.  
When the confirmation message displays, click Yes. The document is  
moved into the Trash folder.  
Deleting a Folder  
Click the folder you want to delete, then do one of the following.  
❍ Choose the Delete command from the Edit menu  
❍ Press the Delete key on your keyboard  
❍ Click the right mouse button and choose Delete.  
When the confirmation message displays, click Yes.  
If you have documents in a folder you are attempting to delete, choosing  
Yes on the confirmation message will delete both the documents and the  
folder. Deleted documents are moved into the Trash folder.  
N
Restoring a Deleted Document  
If a document is in the Trash folder, you can restore it to its original  
folder provided it was deleted from a user-defined folder.  
1. In the Desktop Manager, click the Trash folder.  
2. In the Trash folder, drag the document you want to restore into its  
applicable user-defined folder.  
Documents that have been deleted from the Trash folder cannot be  
restored.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emptying the Trash Folder  
Documents remain in the Trash folder until you move them to a user-  
defined folder, delete them individually, or empty the Trash folder and  
delete all documents in the folder.  
To prevent out-of-date documents from unnecessarily taking up space  
on your hard disk, you should periodically review the Trash folder and  
remove the documents no longer needed.  
Choose the Empty Trash command from the File menu, or click the  
right mouse button on the Trash folder and choose Empty Trash. If  
prompted, confirm that you want to empty the Trash folder.  
Once emptied, all documents are permanently removed from the  
Desktop Manager (and your hard disk).  
Importing a Document  
If you have a document residing on your hard disk or a diskette, you can  
import it into the In Box or a user-defined folder using the Desktop  
Manager. You can import a document saved in any of the following  
formats: TIFF, BMP, FPX, JPG or PCX.  
1. Open the In Box or user-defined folder into which you want to  
import a document.  
2. Choose the Import command from the File menu, or click the right  
mouse button on the folder and choose Import.  
3. In the Import File dialog box, specify the drive, directory, and name  
of the file you want to import, and click Open.  
7-8 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exporting a Document  
You can export a document from the Desktop Manager, saving it to any  
specified drive and directory. When you export a document, you are  
actually saving a copy of the original document. Documents can be  
exported as a TIFF, BMP, FPX, PCX or JPEG file.  
1. Open the folder with the document you want to export.  
2. Click the document you want to export, then choose the Export  
command from the File menu.  
3. In the Export File dialog box, specify the drive and directory where  
you want to place the exported file, and click Save.  
If you export a multiple page document, each page must be  
exported as a separate document.  
Attaching a Document to Electronic Mail (E-mail)  
If you have a MAPI-compliant e-mail application (such as Microsoft  
®
Exchange ) installed on your system, you can attach a document in the  
Desktop Manager to an e-mail message. When you select a document  
and use the E-mail command, the Desktop Manager opens your e-mail  
application, and attaches the selected document to a blank e-mail  
message. You cannot, however, open your e-mail application from the  
Desktop Manager if you don’t plan on attaching a document.  
To attach a document to an e-mail message, select the document you  
want to attach and drag it to the E-mail button on the Process toolbar.  
You can also choose the Send E-mail command from the File menu.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manipulating a Document in Document View  
If you are working in Document View, you can manipulate your  
documents in the open folder in a variety of ways. For example, you can  
arrange documents in a preferred order, remove a page, split a single  
document, or merge one document with another.  
Arranging Documents in Document View  
A document thumbnail in Document View retains its position until you  
rearrange it. You can arrange one or more documents manually or  
automatically.  
When you arrange documents automatically, they are positioned within  
a grid, with row positions filling from left to right.  
Arranging documents manually  
With the desired folder open, select the document you want to move  
and drag it to the desired location within the work area.  
Arranging documents automatically  
With the desired folder open, choose the Arrange command from the  
View menu or the Document toolbar, or click the right mouse button in  
the work area and choose Arrange.  
Scrolling Through a Multi-page Document  
You can scroll through a multiple-page document to position yourself at  
the page you want to remove or where you want to split the document.  
As you scroll pages in the document, the current page number updates  
instantly. After scrolling, the top page is retained even if the folder is  
closed and reopened.  
For the selected document, do one of the following.  
❍ Click the left and right scroll arrows displayed with the page  
numbers for the document.  
7-10 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Drag the scroll tab on the right side of the document.  
Removing a Page From a Document  
You can remove the current top page of a document. For example, you  
may want to remove the cover page from a received fax.  
1. Scroll through the document until the page you want to remove is  
on top.  
2. Choose the Remove Page command from the Edit menu or the  
Document toolbar.  
Splitting a Document  
As may be desirable, you can split a document into two documents  
from any page after the first page. In other words, you cannot split a  
document on page 1. For example, you split a 10-page document,  
beginning at page 5. The original document consists of pages 1 through  
4. The newly created document consists of pages 5 through 10.  
The original document—consisting of at least the first page, up to the  
page where the split occurred—retains the original name. The newly  
created document is assigned a new unique name, which can be changed  
as desired.  
1. Scroll to the page where you want to split the document. The top  
page represents the first page for the newly created document.  
2. Choose the Split command from the Edit menu or Document  
toolbar.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Merging a Document  
You can merge two documents to combine them into a single document.  
The documents are merged in the order you select them. In other words,  
the first document selected becomes the top pages of the second  
document selected. Both documents are merged into the second  
document.  
1. Select the two documents you want to merge (by holding the Ctrl  
key and clicking each document).  
2. Choose the Merge command from the Edit menu or Document  
toolbar.  
Indexing and Searching for Documents  
Each document you add to the Desktop Manager stores key information  
about itself into an internal database giving you great flexiblity when it  
comes to document indexing and searching. You can also manually  
index your documents, adding keywords and other parameters that you  
can use later when searching for documents.  
To index your documents, you first set up your index and then you  
assign the index criteria to your documents.  
Setting Up the Index  
The Desktop Manager allows you to search for documents by date  
and text, as well as by creator, owner, and keyword. Before you can use  
these search criteria however, you must first add them to the Desktop  
Manager.  
7-12 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a creator to the index  
1. In the Desktop Manager, on the Tools menu, point to Index By, and  
then click Creators.  
2. In the Edit Creator List diaog box, click Insert.  
3. Type the creator name you wish to add to the index and press Enter.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each creator you want to add.  
•
You can Remove or Change a creator.  
To close the Edit Creator List dialog box and save your index entries,  
click Close.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding an owner to the index  
1. In the Desktop Manager, on the Tools menu, point to Index By, and  
then click Owner.  
2. In the Edit Creator List diaog box, click Insert.  
3. Type the owner you want to add and then press Enter.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each owner you want to add.  
•
You can Remove or Change an owner.  
To close the Edit Owner List dialog box and save your index entries,  
click Close.  
7-14 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding keywords to the index  
1. In the Desktop Manager, on the Tools menu, point to Index By, and  
then click Keywords.  
2. In the Edit Keyword List diaog box, click Insert.  
3. Type the creator name you wish to add to the index and press Enter.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each creator you want to add.  
•
You can Remove or Change a keyword.  
To close the Edit Keyword List dialog box and save your keywords, click  
Close.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Index Criteria to Documents  
After setting up your index entries, you can assign them to your  
documents. You can index your documents by creator, owner, or  
keyword.  
1. In the Desktop Manager, click the document for which you want to  
add index entries.  
2. On the Tools menu, click Manual Index.  
The Manual Indexing dialog box for this document displays  
showing you the existing Creator, Owner, and any Keywords  
assigned to the document.  
•
3. If you want to review this document, click Display Document.  
7-16 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. To change the Creator of the document, click the Creator button.  
Highlight the creator you wish to assign to the document and  
click OK.  
•
To edit the Creator list, click Edit List. (See page 7-13.)  
•
5. To change the Owner of the document, click the Owner button.  
Highlight the owner you wish to assign to the document and  
click OK.  
•
To edit the Owner list, click Edit List. (See page 7-14.)  
•
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. To change Keywords assigned to the document, click the Keywords  
button.  
Click a keyword you wish to assign to the document, then click  
Add.  
•
To remove a keyword, highlight it in the assigned list and click  
Remove.  
•
To remove all keywords, click Clear.  
•
To edit the Keyword list, click Edit List. (See page 7-15.)  
•
After assigning the keywords, click OK.  
•
7. After making your index entries, click the Submit button to save the  
entries and close the dialog.  
7-18 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching for Your Documents  
You can search for a particular document by Date, Creator, Owner,  
Keyword, or Text string.  
1. On the Tools menu, click Search.  
2. To search by Date or Time, enter the desired From and To dates  
and/or times to display all documents created within this period.  
3. To search by Creator, click the Creator button. Highlight each  
Creator by which you want to search and click Add.  
To remove a selected item, highlight it in the assigned list and  
click Remove.  
•
To remove all selected items, click Clear.  
•
After making your selections, click OK.  
•
4. To search by Owner, click the Owner button. Highlight each Owner  
by which you want to search and click Add.  
To remove a selected item, highlight it in the assigned list and  
click Remove.  
•
To remove all selected items, click Clear.  
•
After making your selections, click OK.  
•
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. To search by Keywords, click the Keywords button. Highlight each  
Keyword by which you want to search and click Add.  
To remove a selected item, highlight it in the assigned list and  
click Remove.  
•
To remove all selected items, click Clear.  
•
After making your selections, click OK.  
•
6. To search by a Text string, enter the Text by which you want to  
search and choose any desired search critiera including:  
Word Match  
Any—Look for the specified text in any part of a word.  
•
Exact—Look for exact text matches only.  
•
Start of Word—Look for the specified text in the start of a word  
only.  
•
Text—Search on text.  
•
Annotation—Search on annotations.  
•
Search On  
Full—Search for all documents.  
•
Last Results—Search only for the last search result.  
•
7-20 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Click Search.  
The search is conducted on all of your folders. Any documents that  
match the document attribute criteria are included in the result list.  
The documents are listed in descending order based on the number  
of search items located in the document.  
To display a document, highlight it in the Results list and click  
the Display button, or double-click the document name.  
•
To start a new search, click the Search button. (This  
automatically closes the current Search Results dialog box.)  
•
Click Close to close the Results List dialog box.  
•
To re-display the Results List for the last search made, from the Tools  
menu, choose the Show Results command.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying a Document  
You can open a document to view its contents, and then annotate it with  
notes, highlighting, stamps, sticky notes, or graphics (line/arrow,  
rectangle, circle). Although you can save the document with the  
annotations, they are only added markings placed on the original  
document, not an integral part. The original contents of the document  
remain intact. If you choose to fax or print the modified document, you  
have the option NOT to include the annotations with the document.  
When you open a document for annotation, the document displays in  
the MultiPASS Viewer.  
STICKY-  
NOTE  
DRAWN  
GRAPHIC  
(CIRCLE AND  
HIGHLIGHT  
ARROW)  
STAMP  
To open a document in the MultiPASS Viewer, do one of the following  
in the Desktop Manager:  
❍ Double-click the document.  
❍ Select the document you want to open, then choose the Open  
Document command from the File menu.  
❍ Drag the document to the Open Document button on the Process  
toolbar.  
7-22 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To annotate a document:  
1. With the document open in the MultiPASS Viewer, adjust the size of  
your view of the document as needed.  
2. Insert the desired annotations.  
3. Choose the Save command from the File menu to save the  
annotations with your document in the Desktop Manager.  
To close the MultiPASS Viewer, choose the Exit command from the File  
menu. If you neglected to save your annotations, you are prompted to  
do so before the program closes.  
Exploring the MultiPASS Viewer Window  
The MultiPASS Viewer window is similar to this:  
MENU BAR  
FILE TOOLBAR  
ANNOTATION  
TOOLBOX  
IMAGE  
TOOLBAR  
LAYOUT AREA  
STATUS BAR  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Bar  
The menu bar contains commands that enable you to perform various  
tasks with your document. Some of the commands can also be accessed  
by their corresponding buttons on the toolbar.  
File Toolbar  
The File toolbar provides you quick access to commands needed to  
open, save, print, edit, and zoom a fax cover page.  
PRINT  
CROP  
HELP  
OPEN  
REDO  
SAVE  
COPY  
UNDO  
ZOOM  
Image Toolbar  
The Image toolbar provides you quick access to commands needed to  
select, lasso, move, zoom, straighten or annotate a document.  
SELECT  
LASSO  
MOVE  
ZOOM  
STRAIGHTEN  
ANNOTATE  
Annotation Toolbox  
The Annotation toolbox allows you to add text and graphics to a  
document. Annotations are not integral elements of the document. You  
can choose to send them with the document, or hide them using the  
Hide/Show Annotations command in the View menu.  
SELECT, RECTANGLE, LINE, ELLIPSE, ARROW, POLYGON  
FREE DRAW, HIGHLIGHTER, TEXT, STAMP, STICKY NOTE  
7-24 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Display Area  
The document itself is displayed and modified in the Document Display  
Area. You can page or scroll through the document, enlarge or reduce  
the view of the document, or change the orientation. The display area  
also contains the results of any annotations you may add to the  
document.  
Status Bar  
The status bar appears at the bottom of the window, and contains useful  
information about the document that you are currently viewing.  
Adjusting the Size and View of a Document  
With different tools in the MultiPASS Viewer, you can adjust both the  
size of your document as well as the manner in which it is displayed.  
Adjusting the Size of a Document  
Adjusting the size of a document can be useful in planning other tasks.  
For example, if a document consists solely of a large graphic, you may  
want to reduce its size so that it can be used later in creating a  
background for a cover page.  
Changing the size of a document involves changing the number of pixels  
used to represent it. Such a change permanently alters the document file.  
1. Choose the Image Size command from the Adjust menu.  
2. In the Image Size dialog box, enter the dimensions of the newly  
sized document.  
3. Click OK. The document file is resized.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Your View of a Document  
In annotating a document, you may need to adjust your view of it. One  
of the ways you can adjust the view of an open document is to hide or  
show the different components of the MultiPASS Viewer.  
To show or hide the components of the window, select the View menu.  
In the View menu, click Toolbars, Status Bar, Rulers, Navigator, and/or  
Annotations. There are three toolbars: FileTools, Image Palette, and  
Straighten Tools. Click the option to show (checkmark) or hide (no  
checkmark) the toolbar.  
For Status Bar, Rulers, Navigator, and Annotations, clicking on a  
command turns the display of the item on and off and changes the  
command name from Show to Hide.  
Changing the Document Orientation  
You may need to rotate a document for easier reading. For example, the  
document may represent a fax you received that was originally sent in  
landscape mode or was fed into a fax machine in an inverted position.  
The change in orientation applies to the entire document, not just the  
currently displayed page.  
In the Edit menu, click Rotate. From the Rotate submenu, click 90, 180  
(flipping the document upside down), or 270.  
Straightening a Document Display  
You may receive a scanned document that displays crookedly in the  
Desktop Manager. Instead of re-scanning the document, you can  
straighten the document display using the Straighten Tools in the  
MultiPASS Viewer.  
1. With the document open in the MultiPASS Viewer, click the  
Straighten button on the Image toolbar. Crosshairs display over  
your document, and the Straighten toolbar displays.  
ROTATE  
STRAIGHTEN  
CLOCKWISE  
ROTATE  
COUNTERCLOCKWISE  
7-26 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. On the Straighten toolbar, click the Rotate Clockwise or Rotate  
Counterclockwise buttons until the document is evenly aligned in  
the crosshairs.  
3. On the Straighten toolbar, click the Straighten button.  
4. Save your changes.  
Adjusting the Document and Display Size  
The MultiPASS Viewer also offers different levels of magnification to  
enable you to work at the most comfortable size for your document. You  
can zoom in and out at predefined increments or specify a particular  
size or scale.  
You can use the Fit to Width option to fill the width of the window with  
your page display, or use the Fit to Window option to adjust the  
document image size so that the entire document is visible within the  
window.  
To zoom in or zoom out on the document, do one of the following.  
❍ From the View menu, click Zoom, then select the desired level of  
magnification.  
❍ From the File toolbar, select the desired level of magnification from  
the list.  
❍ From the Image toolbar, click the Zoom tool and:  
To increase magnification, click the document.  
•
To decrease magnification, press and hold the Alt key, then click  
the document.  
•
To fit the cover page to the display window, click Fit Image to Window  
from the View menu.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scrolling through a Zoomed Cover Page  
If you need to work on particular aspects of a document (for example,  
to modify a recurring graphic), you can scroll through the document  
while maintaining a high level of magnification. To do this, you use the  
Navigator and Scroll tools.  
To select a specific size or scale for enlarging or reducing the document,  
click Zoom on the View menu. On the Zoom menu, click the desired  
size. Or, click the size or scale from the list box on the toolbar.  
1. From the View menu, click Show Navigator. The Navigator window  
opens in the right corner of the screen. Inside the Navigator, a white  
rectangle indicates the area of your document that is currently in  
view.  
2. On the Image toolbar, click the Move button. The cursor turns into  
a hand.  
3. While tracking your position in the Navigator window, click and  
hold the left mouse button and drag the image to bring the desired  
area of the document into view.  
7-28 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the Base Image  
While working with a document, you may need to edit the base image  
that underlies all annotations. When editing a base image, you can select,  
crop, or flip a specific area. For example, to create a novel effect, you may  
want to flip an imbedded graphic on its vertical or horizontal axis.  
1. On the Image toolbar, choose either the Select or Lasso tool.  
Use the Select tool for areas that fit easily inside a square or  
rectangle.  
•
Use the Lasso tool for irregularly shaped areas.  
•
2. Drag the cursor to draw the appropriately shaped container for the  
area you want to select.  
Cropping a document  
You can crop a document to any size that you select.  
1. Select the area of the document to which you want the entire  
document to conform.  
2. Choose Crop Inplace from the Edit menu or File toolbar.  
Flipping a Document or Selected Area  
Flipping a document may be useful; for example, if you want to create a  
mirror image of a graphic.  
To flip the entire cover page, select Flip from the Edit menu, then choose  
Horizontal or Vertical.  
To flip a selected area of a cover page, select the area and then select Flip  
from the Edit menu; now choose Horizontal or Vertical.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Annotations to Your Document  
To annotate a document through the MultiPASS Viewer, you must click  
on the Annotate button on the Image toolbar. The Annotation Tools are  
then displayed on the screen and the Annotation menu is added to the  
menu bar.  
The following sections describe the various ways you can annotate your  
document.  
Setting Font Defaults  
In adding annotations to your document, you can use a number of  
different text tools. Each tool includes options for adjusting font style,  
size, and effects. Additionally, you can also select a set of font properties  
to be used as defaults whenever font properties are not customized for a  
particular tool.  
1. Choose the Select Font command from the Annotation menu.  
2. In the Font dialog box, select your preferred options.  
3. Click OK.  
7-30 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Text to a Document  
You can add text on any portion of your document. When you do so,  
you can choose the text attributes: font, font size and color, and special  
effects (underline, strikeout), background color and mode.  
You can type any text that you want, editing it later as necessary. If you  
select a font, font size, a color, or special effect, it affects the entire note.  
If you change any of the attributes while editing a note, or while the note  
is selected, it changes all the text in the note.  
1. If not selected, click the Annotations button on the Image toolbar.  
2. On the Annotations toolbar, click the Text tool and drag the cursor  
to draw an appropriately sized square or rectangle in the layout area.  
3. Enter the new text.  
4. Click the Select Annotations tool from the Annotations toolbar, then  
click the new text.  
5. Right-click inside the newly drawn square or rectangle to select the  
desired text adjustment options from the Annotations option.  
Click Select Font to set font properties for the text.  
•
Click Set Background Color to set a background color.  
•
Click Set Foreground Color to set a text color.  
•
6. Click outside the text box.  
7. From the File menu, click Save. The new text is added to the  
document.  
Editing text added to a document  
1. On the Annotation toolbox, with the Selection tool selected, double-  
click the text you added. The cursor changes to an insertion point.  
2. Edit the text as needed.  
3. Click outside the area of the text box.  
4. From the File menu, click Save.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a Sticky-Note  
Rather than add text directly to a document, as you do with the Text  
tool, you can add a Sticky-Note to any portion of the document.  
When you add a Sticky-Note, you can choose the text attributes: font,  
font size and color, background color, and special effects (underline,  
strikeout).  
You can type any text that you want for the Sticky-Note, editing the note  
later if necessary. If you select a font, font size, a color, or special effect,  
it affects the entire note. If you change any of the attributes while editing  
a note, or while the note is selected, it changes all the text in the note.  
1. In the Annotations toolbar, click the Sticky-Note tool and drag the  
cursor to draw an appropriately sized square or rectangle.  
2. Type the text of your note.  
3. Click the Select Annotations tool, then click the Sticky-Note.  
4. Select the desired adjustment options from the Annotation menu.  
Click Select Font to set font properties for the text.  
•
Click Background Color to set a background color for the note.  
•
5. To add the Sticky-Note to document, click outside its borders.  
Editing the text in a sticky-note  
1. On the Annotation Toolbar, with the Selection tool selected, double-  
click the Sticky-Note. The cursor changes to an insertion point.  
2. Edit the text as needed.  
3. Click outside the area of the Sticky-Note.  
7-32 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a Stamp  
You can add either a text or graphic image stamp to your document. The  
Desktop Manager contains a library of available stamp images, stored as  
BMP files, that were installed with the Desktop Manager software.  
Additionally, you can add graphics into the stamp library provided the  
graphic is saved in a BMP format.  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. In the Select Stamp dialog box, click Add. An Open dialog box  
displays.  
3. Locate the BMP file you wish to add to the Stamp library and click  
Open. If you have multiple graphics you want to add, repeat this  
step.  
4. Click the first graphic you want to insert into the document and  
click OK.  
5. Click the Stamp tool on the Annotation toolbox.  
6. Click the mouse at the location where you want to place the stamp  
in the layout area.  
7. To add a different stamp to the cover page, choose the Select Stamp  
command from the Annotation menu.  
8. Click the stamp you want to insert and click OK.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Click the Stamp tool on the Annotation toolbox.  
10. Click the mouse at the location where you want to place the stamp  
in the layout area.  
Creating a Text Stamp  
You can also create and use a Text Stamp on a document.  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu. The  
Select Stamp dialog box displays.  
2. Click the Text Stamp tab.  
3. Click Add.  
4. In the Text Stamp Edit box, type the text you wish to assign to the  
Stamp.  
To add a date to the stamp, click Date.  
•
To add the current time to the stamp, click Time.  
•
To change the font and text characteristics of the text, click Font.  
•
5. Click OK to close the Edit Text Stamp dialog box.  
6. Click OK again to save the text stamp and close the Select Stamp  
dialog box.  
7-34 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a text stamp  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. Click the Text Stamp tab.  
3. Click the stamp you want to edit, then click Edit.  
4. Modify the text and click OK.  
5. Click OK to close the Select Stamp dialog box.  
Removing an image or text stamp  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. Click the stamp you wish to remove, then click Delete. A  
confirmation message displays.  
3. Click Yes.  
4. Click OK to close the Select Stamp dialog box.  
Inserting a text stamp  
1. Choose the Select Stamp command from the Annotation menu.  
2. Click the Text Stamp tab on the Select Stamp dialog box.  
3. Click the text stamp you wish to insert into the document and click  
OK.  
4. Click the mouse at the location where you want to place the text  
stamp in the layout area.  
Highlighting Your Document  
You can add a color highlight to text or other images in a document. To  
do this, select a color and then draw a rectangular highlight over the  
desired area. All highlight colors are transparent and display in the color  
you specify. When you print the document, the highlighted region prints  
as gray shadings.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Highlighting a region  
1. On the Annotations toolbox, click the Highlighter tool.  
2. To select a highlighting background color, choose the Background  
Color command from the Annotation menu, then select the desired  
color.  
3. Drag the cursor over the area you want to highlight. When you  
release the mouse button, the highlight is completed.  
Creating a Drawing Graphic  
You can also annotate a document with one or more drawing objects  
that include a straight line, a single-headed arrow, a hollow rectangle,  
and a hollow circle or ellipse. When you draw the object you can select  
the color, line thickness, and style of line for the object.  
1. On the Annotation toolbox, click the drawing object tool:  
Arrow/Line, Rectangle, or Circle.  
2. From the Annotation menu, select the color, line thickness, and style  
of line for the object you are drawing. For an arrow or line, also  
select the particular style you want to use.  
3. At the desired location in the layout area, drag the cursor to draw  
the object. When you release the mouse button, the object is  
completed.  
Revising Your Annotations  
Once you have added annotations to your document, you can revise  
them as needed. For example, you may want to resize, move, delete or  
cut, or copy and paste an annotation.  
7-36 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting One or More Annotations  
To revise an annotation, you must first select it. In most situations, you  
can select one or more annotations at a time.  
To select a single annotation, click the Select Annotations button on the  
Annotations toolbar. Then click the annotation.  
To select multiple annotations, make sure the Select Annotations button  
is selected. Then hold down the Shift key and click each annotation. You  
cannot resize an annotation using this method.  
Moving an Annotation  
You can move an annotation from one position to another.  
Select the annotation and drag it to the desired location.  
Resizing the Annotation  
When you create an annotation, you draw it to the desired size. If the  
original size proves unsuitable, you can resize the annotation either  
smaller or larger.  
Click the border of the annotation and drag any sizing handle.  
Copying Fields  
If you want to copy a field or graphic item and paste it into another  
Windows application that supports a Paste option, you can do so using  
the Copy command. When you copy a field or graphic item, it is placed  
in the Cover Page Designer clipboard. From the clipboard, you can paste  
it into any Windows application that supports this command.  
1. Select the field/graphic element to be copied. Then, choose the Copy  
command from the Edit menu or toolbar, or click the right mouse  
button and select Copy from the Edit menu.  
2. Open the Windows application where you want to paste the item.  
3. Paste the item into the Windows application (usually, by selecting  
the Paste command from the Edit menu or toolbar).  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing an Annotation  
If you decide you no longer want an item to appear in a document, you  
can remove it permanently by selecting it, then pressing the Delete key.  
Reverting to the Last Saved Version  
If you are dissatisfied with changes that you have made to your  
document, you can discard them and return to the last saved version.  
Choose the Revert to Original command from the File menu.  
Printing the Document  
You can print a copy of the document currently open in the MultiPASS  
Viewer, with or without any annotations you may have created. Prior to  
printing, you can specify certain print setup options.  
To print the document without annotations, you must select Hide  
Annotations from the View menu prior to printing. (To do so, the  
Annotation toolbar must be closed.)  
N
On the File menu, click Print or Print Setup. Specify your print options  
and click OK.  
7-38 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Previewing the Document Before Printing  
1. Choose the Print Preview command from the File menu.  
2. From the Print Preview window, you can:  
Click Print to print the document.  
•
Click Next Page or Prev Page to view other document pages.  
•
Click Two Pages to view two pages at a time.  
•
Click Zoom In or Zoom Out to better view the document.  
•
Click Close to close the window without printing.  
•
Adjusting the MultiPASS Viewer  
Default Options  
As you work in the MultiPASS Viewer, you can change options that  
affect the view and scale of the open document.  
1. Choose the Preferences command from the File menu.  
2. In the Preferences dialog box, select your options.  
Select a Unit of Measurement from the list.  
•
Enable or disable the “Automatically fit window to image on any  
change” option.  
•
Enable or disable the “High quality when zooming” option.  
•
3. Click OK.  
Chapter 7  
Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager 7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-40 Working With Documents in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Other Utilities in the  
Desktop Manager  
8
This chapter contains information and instructions on changing your  
MultiPASS C3500 setup options in the Desktop Manager, and using  
other Desktop Manager utilities. It includes:  
❍ Fax setup  
❍ System setup  
❍ Launcher setup  
❍ Making a phone call from the Desktop Manager  
❍ Using the MultiPASS Server  
❍ Closing the MultiPASS Server  
❍ Disconnecting the MultiPASS  
❍ Uninstalling the MultiPASS software  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Setup  
The Desktop Manager contains setup options that define the fax  
operation of your MultiPASS C3500 and that affect the general  
operation of the Desktop Manager. You can set options that affect  
preferences, sending a PC fax, receiving a fax, and using the speed  
dial features.  
When you first install the Desktop Manager, setup options are set to  
appropriate default settings. The default settings enable you to begin  
using your MultiPASS with the Desktop Manager immediately. However,  
you can change option settings as needed.  
Because you can make changes to some option settings either on the  
MultiPASS unit or in the Desktop Manager, be aware of the following:  
❍ Any option setting you make on the MultiPASS unit does not display  
in the Desktop Manager Setup Options dialog box.  
❍ Any change you make to an option in the Desktop Manager  
overrides the corresponding setting you may have made on the  
MultiPASS unit itself.  
Therefore, before you make changes to these option settings, decide  
where you prefer to make your changes—on the MultiPASS unit or in  
the Desktop Manager. Establishing a preference for changes will help you  
avoid overriding your previous settings.  
When the MultiPASS is connected to your PC, we recommend that you  
use the Fax Setup dialog box in the Desktop Manager. Do not make your  
changes using the operator panel of the MultiPASS.  
N
The following instructions summarize the overall procedures for  
changing MultiPASS Fax Setup options in the Desktop Manager.  
8-2 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. In the Fax Setup dialog box, click the appropriate tab to display the  
options you want to verify or change.  
2. Once you have the appropriate Fax Setup tab displayed, specify your  
changes.  
3. To save changes and close the dialog box, click OK. When prompted,  
choose whether or not you want to overwrite the settings on your  
MultiPASS.  
To exit the dialog box without saving your changes, click Cancel.  
•
When you save your changes, the MultiPASS Fax Setup options are saved  
in the Desktop Manager, as well as on the MultiPASS unit.  
Setting Up Fax Preferences  
To set up various fax options, choose the Fax Setup command from the  
Setup menu.  
You see the Fax Setup dialog box. You can change the following options  
on the Preferences tab.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date Format  
You can select the format used to display the date on the MultiPASS  
LCD and for printing the date on a fax from the list.  
Display Language  
You can select the language to be used on the MultiPASS LCD from the  
list.  
Telephone Attached to Unit  
If you have a telephone attached to your MultiPASS, click this checkbox.  
When selected, you can use the Desktop Manager to dial a phone  
number.  
When you select this option, the Phone command (in the File menu and  
toolbar) becomes available in the Desktop Manager.  
Volume  
You can set the volume level of the various sound components of your  
MultiPASS to best suit your office environment.  
Setting Up Send Fax Options  
You can change the following options on the Send Fax tab.  
8-4 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Information  
You can specify the following information that displays as the header for  
a PC fax: your name, company name, and fax number. Initially, you set  
up this information when you installed the Desktop Manager.  
Phone Line  
You can specify the dialing method the MultiPASS printer will use:  
touch tone or rotary pulse. You also specify any prefix used to access an  
outside phone line (usually 9).  
Retries  
You can specify the number of retries the system should attempt when  
sending a fax transmission, and the length of time between each retry.  
Report  
You can specify whether or not you want a report to print with each fax  
transmission (Every trans.), or only when there is an error (Only  
Errors). You can also specify if you want an image of the first page of the  
fax included in the report. (The report prints the image for plain paper  
faxes only, not for PC faxes.)  
Restoring the Default Settings  
If you want to restore the option default settings after making changes,  
click Use Defaults.  
Setting Up Advanced Send Fax Options  
You can change the following options by clicking Advanced on the Send  
Fax tab.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed  
You can set the transmission speed used to send faxes. The higher the  
setting, the faster the transmission. If you experience problems when  
sending faxes, try a lower speed setting.  
Pause Duration  
You can set the length of the pause that you may have to insert when  
dialing a long distance number.  
Error Correction (ECM)  
You can select this option to reduce system and line errors when sending  
a fax. With this option selected, the system checks each outgoing fax for  
lost data. If data has been lost from a portion of a page, the system  
transmits that portion again after confirming that all data within that  
portion can be transmitted successfully.  
Auto Start Send  
When you select this option, the MultiPASS starts scanning  
automatically when you enter a number and press START or when you  
press a speed dial number. If you don’t select this option, you must press  
START twice to scan the document.  
Off Hook Alarm  
You select this option to turn on the alarm if the telephone’s handset is  
off-hook.  
Image Contrast  
You can select a setting that determines the level of contrast in the  
faxes you send. The Standard setting is usually appropriate for most  
documents. However, based on the lightness or darkness of your original  
fax document, you may prefer to lighten (Lighter) or darken (Darker)  
the contrast for the fax transmission.  
Fax Heading Position  
You can select where you want the sent fax heading information (your  
fax number, your name, and date and time) to print on the faxes you  
send. This information is known as the Transmit Terminal Identification  
(TTI).  
On Error Resend  
You can select this option if you want the MultiPASS to automatically  
redial when an error occurs while sending a fax. If this option is selected,  
you also select which pages should be resent:  
❍ All Pages—all pages of the fax.  
8-6 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Error and First Page—the page on which the error occurred, all  
pages following the error, and the first page of the fax.  
❍ Error Pages—the page on which the error occurred, and all  
following pages.  
Setting Up Receive Fax Options  
You can change the following options on the Receive Fax tab.  
Paper Size  
You can select the size of the paper you are using for printing a fax.  
Reduction  
You can specify whether you want an incoming fax reduced to ensure  
the contents fits on the paper on which it is printed. If you want to  
reduce the incoming fax, you can fit to height only, or both the height  
and width, to fit the paper size.  
Answer Receive Mode  
You can select the mode by which you want the MultiPASS to receive  
incoming calls:  
❍ Fax Telephone Switching (FaxTel)—Automatically switch for  
receiving a call either as a fax or telephone call  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Dedcated Fax Receive (FaxOnly)—Automatically receive only fax  
calls  
❍ Manual Receive (Manual)—Require you to manually answer the  
incoming call and then set the MultiPASS for an incoming fax  
❍ Answering Machine Mode (AnsMode)—Automatically receive a call  
with your answering machine  
❍ Distinct Ring Pattern Detect (DRPD)—Automatically switch  
between receiving a call either as a fax or telephone call based on the  
ring tone for each type of call (This setting is applicable only if you  
subscribe to a special network service with your phone company  
that defines multiple ring tones for your phone line.)  
Answer Silent Receive  
You select this option to set the MultiPASS not to ring for an incoming  
fax. (This is applicable only in FaxTel Mode and Fax Only Mode.)  
Answer Number of Rings  
If you cleared the Silent Receive option, indicating you want the  
MultiPASS to ring for incoming fax calls, you specify the number of  
times the MultiPASS should ring for the fax call. The MultiPASS will  
only ring if you have connected a telephone.  
Receive Conditions  
You can specify how the system should handle an incoming fax under  
the following conditions.  
❍ If your computer is turned off:  
You set the MultiPASS to print the fax (Print Fax) or save the fax in  
its memory (Save in Memory).  
❍ If your computer is turned on:  
You set the MultiPASS to move the fax to the Desktop Manager on  
your computer (Upload Fax), or to print the fax (Print Fax).  
Report Print  
You can specify whether or not you want a report to print with each fax  
reception, or only when there is an error.  
Restoring the Default Settings  
If you want to restore the option default settings after making changes,  
click Use Defaults.  
8-8 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Advanced Receive Fax Options  
To change the following Advanced Receive Send Fax options, click  
Advanced on the Receive Fax tab. You see this dialog box:  
Speed  
You can set the transmission speed used to receive faxes. The higher the  
setting, the faster the fax is received. If you experience problems when  
receiving faxes, try a lower speed setting.  
Error Correction (ECM)  
You can select this option to reduce system and line errors when  
receiving a fax. With this option selected, the system checks each  
incoming fax for lost data. If data has been lost from a portion of a page,  
the system receives that portion again after confirming that all data  
within that portion can be received successfully.  
Ink/Toner Saver Mode  
You can select this option if you want to print documents in the  
Desktop Manager using a reduced amount of ink, thereby saving ink.  
When using this option, the printed document may appear to be less  
bright or contrasted.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax/Telephone Switching Options  
You set the options if your Receive mode is Fax/Tel switching.  
Listen Time Before Ringing  
When a call is received, the MultiPASS checks to see if the call is from a  
fax machine or a telephone. If the MultiPASS does not have enough time  
to detect the fax tone, it assumes the call is from a telephone. You use  
this option to set the appropriate amount of time to allow the  
MultiPASS to check for the type of call.  
Ring Time  
When your MultiPASS is set to receive both fax and telephone calls, it  
rings to inform you of an incoming telephone call. If you do not pick up  
the telephone within a certain amount of time, the MultiPASS stops  
ringing. You use this option to set the appropriate amount of time the  
MultiPASS should ring.  
Ring Tone  
You can set the volume level of the ring tone.  
Default Action If No Answer to Telephone  
You set this option to Receive if you want the MultiPASS to handle an  
incoming call, detected as a telephone call that is not answered, as an  
incoming fax. If no fax is received, the line is then disconnected. If you  
set this option to Disconnect, the MultiPASS automatically disconnects  
the unanswered call, without trying to receive a fax.  
Answering Machine Mode Options  
You use this option only if you set the Receive mode on the Receive Fax  
tab to answering machine mode, and your fax sender may be using a fax  
machine that does not emit a send fax signal.  
Receive Fax If No Signal  
Select this option to have the MultiPASS automatically receive a call as a  
fax call if a send fax signal is not detected for the number of seconds you  
specify. Clear this option to have the MultiPASS remain in answering  
machine mode even if no send fax signal is detected. If no sound is  
detected by the MultiPASS (such as the caller speaking to leave a  
message), the answering machine disconnects.  
Silent Period  
Set the number of seconds you want the MultiPASS to check for a send  
fax signal.  
8-10 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Receive  
You select this option so that you can receive a fax by pressing an ID  
code on the telephone attached to the MultiPASS. If you select this  
option, you must assign a remote identification number that signals the  
MultiPASS to receive the fax.  
Remote Identification Number  
If you enable the Remote Receive option, you assign the identification  
number you will use to set the MultiPASS to receive a fax. The default  
number is 25.  
DRPD Switch Options  
You can select this option if you subscribe to the Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection (DRPD) service through your phone company. You  
then specify each ring pattern you have been assigned, with its associated  
action, fax ID, and fax number.  
When you select this option, the Receive mode is automatically set to  
receive both fax and telephone calls.  
Ring Pattern  
If you subscribe to DRPD through your phone company, select the ring  
pattern assigned to each phone number by your phone company:  
Normal (single-ring), Double (double-ring), S-S-L (short-short-long  
ring), S-L-S (short-long-short ring), or Other.  
Action  
If you subscribe to DRPD through your phone company, select the type  
of call to be received for each selected ring pattern. Typically, you would  
specify telephone calls for one ring pattern and fax calls for the other  
ring pattern. However, if necessary, you can specify that a selected ring  
pattern switch between receiving telephone and fax calls.  
Fax ID  
If you subscribe to DRPD through your phone company, enter your  
name or company name (or some other fax recipient identification) for  
each selected ring pattern. This information is transmitted to the caller’s  
fax machine and displayed in the caller’s LCD as verification.  
Fax Number  
If you subscribe to DRPD through your phone company, enter the  
phone number assigned for receiving a call for each ring pattern. This  
information is transmitted to the caller’s fax machine and displayed in  
the caller’s LCD as verification.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Speed Dial Assignments  
On the Speed Dial tab, you can set up fax numbers for speed dialing  
with the MultiPASS. You use the fax recipients set up in your Address  
Book, assigning the desired individual to speed dial codes. If the  
recipient has not yet been set up in the Address Book, you can add the  
recipient while creating speed dial assignments. You can also set up a  
group speed dial, by assigning two or more individuals to a single speed  
dial assignment.  
For reference, you can print the list of speed dial assignments to display  
near the MultiPASS.  
Assigning an Individual to a Speed Dial Code  
This section provides instructions for assigning a single recipient to a  
speed dial code.  
1. In the Address Book list box, click on the recipient that you want to  
assign to a speed dial code.  
2. Select the speed dial code to which you want to assign the recipient,  
and click Add.  
8-12 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To remove a recipient from a speed dial code, select the speed dial  
assignment, and then click Remove.  
To print the speed dial assignment list, click Print List. Because of the  
list columns width, the first and last names of an address book entry  
may not fully display.  
To add a recipient to the Address Book, click New. In the New Individual  
Entry dialog box, complete the appropriate information for the recipient  
and then click Add. For detailed instructions on completing the New  
Individual Entry dialog box, see Adding and Editing an Individual  
Address on page 3-14.  
Defining a Group Speed Dial Code  
This section provides instructions for assigning two or more recipients  
to a speed dial code.  
1. On the Speed Dial tab, make sure the desired recipients for your  
group are set up as individual speed dial assignments.  
2. Select the speed dial code to which you want to assign the group of  
recipients, and click Group Dial.  
3. In the Group Name box, enter a name for the group assignment.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. In the Speed Dial list box, select the first recipient and click Add.  
Repeat this procedure until the desired recipients are included in the  
Members list box.  
To remove a member from the group, select the member in the  
Members list box and click Remove.  
•
When all the desired members are listed in the Members list  
box, click OK to save your group.  
•
To close the dialog box without saving your group, click Cancel.  
•
System Setup  
You can set up various system settings using the System Setup dialog box.  
Choose the System Setup command from the Setup menu.  
You see the System Setup dialog box:  
8-14 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Include Annotations On  
You can specify on what documents you want to display or hide  
document annotations—on Printed Pages, E-mail Attachments, Files  
Exported to Windows, or Send Fax Image. To enable the option (and  
show annotations), click the applicable checkbox.  
E-Mail Attachments  
You can specify the format you wish to use for color and monochrome  
document e-mail attachments—BMP, FPX, JPG PCX, or TIF. To make a  
selection, click the applicable button.  
Document Deletion  
Click the “Confirm before Deleting” checkbox to display a confirmation  
message before deleting a document.  
Other  
Click “Automatic Indexing” to allow for automatic indexing.  
After making your settings, click OK.  
Launcher Setup  
You can change the contents of the Launcher using the Launcher  
Properties dialog box. Choose the Launcher Setup command from the  
Setup menu.  
You see the Launcher Setup screen:  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Click the next Empty location, then click Edit; or click a blank  
launcher icon, click the right mouse button, and click Edit.  
2. Click Browse. A standard Windows Browse dialog box displays.  
3. Locate the .EXE file you wish to add to the Launcher, highlight it,  
and click Open.  
4. Select a File Type (Conversion) option from the File Type list. This  
allows you to start an application by dragging and dropping a  
document onto the Launcher Bar application and have the  
document converted into the specified format. You can specify that  
documents be converted to:  
Bitmap (*.bmp)  
•
Flashpix (*.fpx)  
•
JPEG (*.jpg)  
•
PC Paintbrush (*.pcx)  
•
TIFF (*.tif)  
•
Plain text (*.txt)  
•
5. Click OK to close the Edit Launcher Items dialog box.  
6. Click OK to close the Launcher Setup dialog box and add the  
program to the Launcher bar.  
You can also drag and drop an .EXE file from the Windows desktop or  
Windows Explorer onto an empty Launcher spot, then edit the  
application’s properties as desired.  
N
8-16 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Launcher Application  
1. Choose the Launcher Setup command from the Setup menu.  
2. Click the desired application, then click Edit.  
Change the assigned Program file or file type as desired and  
click OK.  
•
To re-arrange the order of Launcher items, highlight an  
application, then use the Move Up or Move Down buttons.  
•
To delete an item, highlight it and click Delete.  
•
3. Click OK to close the Launcher Properties dialog box.  
You can also click the right mouse button on a launcher icon, then click  
Edit to edit a launcher application or Delete to delete the icon.  
Using the Launcher  
You can use the Launcher in one of two ways:  
❍ Click an application to start it.  
❍ Drag and drop a document onto an application to start the  
application and display the document in the specified file format.  
When you launch a document, a copy of the document is displayed in  
the application with a system assigned name. If you save the document,  
it is saved with the system assigned name in your C:\Windows\Temp  
directory. If you want to give the document a more meaningful name,  
use the Save As command. Any modifications made to the document are  
made to the copy, and not the original document stored in the Desktop  
Manager.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Phone Call From the Desktop  
Manager  
You can use the MultiPASS and Desktop Manager to dial telephone  
calls if:  
❍ You have a telephone attached to the MultiPASS  
❍ You selected the “Telephone Attached to Unit” option on the  
Preferences tab in the Setup Options dialog box in the Desktop  
Manager.  
You can place a call to any individual you want, whether or not the  
individual has been set up in the Address Book. At the time you are  
attempting to make your call, you can also set up an individual in the  
Address Book.  
Placing a Phone Call  
1. Choose the Phone command from the File menu or toolbar.  
2. In the Phone dialog box, enter the phone number you want to call,  
or select an Address Book entry.  
When you enter the phone number, you use the applicable numeric  
characters and any valid characters that separate the different  
segments of the phone number. For example, you can use 0 through  
9, dash (-), or parentheses (). Other characters are also available for  
entering a phone number. For a complete list of the characters that  
are valid in the Desktop Manager, refer to Appendix B.  
8-18 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. To add an individual to the Address Book, click New Individual and  
complete the Individual Entry dialog box. For details on completing  
the Individual Entry dialog box, see Adding and Editing an  
Individual Address on page 3-14.  
4. With the phone number entered or selected, click Dial.  
5. When the Dialing Phone dialog box displays, you are prompted to  
pick up the handset.  
6. When you have completed your call, click Exit.  
Using the MultiPASS Server  
The MultiPASS Server is a utility that tracks the current status of the  
MultiPASS, incoming and outgoing faxes, print and scan jobs, and any  
error conditions needing your attention. When you install the  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager, the MultiPASS Server is placed in the  
Windows Startup menu. Therefore, the MultiPASS Server starts each  
time you start up Windows.  
The MultiPASS Server displays as an icon in the notification area of the  
Windows taskbar or as a window. In either case, the MultiPASS Server  
alternates the status message shown for more than one activity occurring  
at the same time. For example, if the sending of a fax and an out-of-  
paper error condition occur at the same, the MultiPASS Server alternates  
the display of the corresponding messages.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you close the MultiPASS Server, you can open it from the Windows  
desktop:  
❍ From the Windows desktop, click Start, point to Programs, then  
point to MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3.0, and click MultiPASS  
Server.  
From the Desktop Manager, choose the MultiPASS Server command  
from the Tools menu to open the MultiPASS Server window.  
Using the Minimized MultiPASS Server  
The minimized MultiPASS Server appears as an icon in the notification  
area of the Windows taskbar.  
The graphical appearance of the icon depicts the type of activity it is  
reporting. For example, the scan graphic is used to depict the status of  
scan activity.  
Click the right mouse button on the icon to display a menu allowing you  
to open the MultiPASS Server window, open the Desktop Manager,  
specify that the icon always be on top, display device information, and  
close the MultiPASS Server.  
To open the MultiPASS Server window from the icon, click Restore on  
the MultiPASS Server menu.  
To open the Desktop Manager from the MultiPASS Server icon, click Go  
To Manager on the MultiPASS Server menu.  
To keep the icon on top, click Always On Top. To display information  
about the MultiPASS, click on Device Information.  
To close the MultiPASS Server, click Close on the MultiPASS Server  
menu.  
Using the MultiPASS Server Window  
The MultiPASS Server window displays the status of MultiPASS activity  
only. You cannot use the MultiPASS Server to interrupt an activity.  
8-20 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The MultiPASS Server window contains commands that enable you to:  
open the Desktop Manager, specify the MultiPASS Server as the top  
window at all times, display device information, close the window and  
return to the minimized MultiPASS Server, and close the MultiPASS  
Server.  
To open the menu on the MultiPASS Server window, click the right  
mouse button in the MultiPASS Server window.  
To open the Desktop Manager, click Go To Manager on the menu. Or,  
click the Manager (M) in the window title bar.  
To specify the MultiPASS Server as the top window, click Always On Top  
on the displayed menu.  
To display information about the MultiPASS, click on Device  
Information.  
To return to the MultiPASS Server icon, click Minimize on the  
MultiPASS Server menu. Or, in the window title bar, click the Minimize  
button (–).  
To close the MultiPASS Server, click the Close button in the window  
title bar.  
Status Messages  
The MultiPASS Server reports the following statuses for the MultiPASS.  
Idle  
The MultiPASS is currently inactive.  
Scanning  
The MultiPASS is scanning an image. The MultiPASS Server window  
displays the number of the page currently being scanned.  
Printing  
The MultiPASS is printing a document.  
Sending Fax  
The MultiPASS is sending a fax document. The MultiPASS Server  
window displays the number of the page currently being faxed.  
Receiving Fax  
The MultiPASS is receiving a fax document. The MultiPASS Server  
window displays the number of the page currently being received.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attention Needed  
The MultiPASS needs your attention for situations such as the  
MultiPASS being out of paper. The MultiPASS Server window describes  
the nature of the attention required.  
When you have corrected the situation, the status message automatically  
clears.  
Error Warning  
The MultiPASS has a problem that needs your immediate attention, such  
as when the MultiPASS Server can no longer detect the MultiPASS. The  
MultiPASS Server window displays the nature of the problem with a  
comment indicating a corrective action.  
When you have corrected the situation, the status message automatically  
clears.  
Closing the MultiPASS Server  
If you decide you need to disconnect the MultiPASS from the designated  
port and/or attach another device to the port, you should close the  
MultiPASS Server first. If you close the MultiPASS Server first, you avoid  
receiving error messages when the MultiPASS Server detects it can no  
longer communicate with the MultiPASS.  
When you start the Desktop Manager again at a later time, the  
MultiPASS Server is automatically reopened if your MultiPASS has been  
reconnected to the port. You can also open the MultiPASS Server from  
the Windows desktop without opening the Desktop Manager.  
If you are closing the MultiPASS Server, you may want to set the  
MultiPASS to print any received faxes (see page 8-7 for details on setting  
Receive Conditions). With the MultiPASS Server closed, received faxes  
cannot be moved to the Desktop Manager.  
Received faxes can be stored in memory on the MultiPASS. However, if  
the memory becomes full, the MultiPASS is unable to receive more faxes  
until you print the faxes stored in memory.  
Before closing the MultiPASS Server, close the MultiPASS Desktop  
Manager. Then, in the notification area of the Windows taskbar, click the  
right mouse button on the MultiPASS Server icon and click Close.  
8-22 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the MultiPASS Server From StartUp  
Closing the MultiPASS Server does not remove it from the Windows  
StartUp group. If you have disconnected your MultiPASS, the next time  
you start Windows, the MultiPASS Server will try to open. At that time,  
the MultiPASS Server will be unable to detect the device and it will  
display an error message.  
When you close the message dialog box, the MultiPASS Server closes  
automatically, because it cannot detect the MultiPASS unit. Your port  
remains available for you to use with other devices.  
However, if you would like to prevent the message from displaying each  
time you start Windows, you can remove the MultiPASS Server from the  
StartUp group.  
The following instructions summarize the procedures for removing a  
program from Windows StartUp. For more details, refer to your  
Windows user documentation.  
1. On the Windows desktop, click the right mouse button on Start.  
2. On the displayed menu, click Open.  
3. In the Start Menu window, double click the Programs icon.  
4. In the Programs window, double-click the StartUp icon.  
5. In the StartUp window, click the MultiPASS Server icon and press  
the Delete key.  
Restarting the MultiPASS Server  
If you reconnect the MultiPASS to the port and want to begin using the  
Desktop Manager again, the MultiPASS Server is restarted automatically  
when you open the Desktop Manager. You can also open the MultiPASS  
Server without opening the Desktop Manager.  
1. On the Windows desktop, click Start and then point to Programs.  
2. On the Programs menu, point to Canon MultiPASS Desktop  
Manager 3.0, then click Canon MultiPASS Server.  
The MultiPASS Server starts automatically.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding the MultiPASS Server to StartUp  
When you reconnect your MultiPASS printer device, you will probably  
want to add the MultiPASS Server to the StartUp group again (if you  
removed it as described earlier). With the MultiPASS Server in StartUp,  
the MultiPASS Server automatically opens when Windows is started.  
The following instructions summarize the procedures for adding a  
program to Windows StartUp. For more details, refer to your Windows  
user documentation.  
1. Open Windows Explorer.  
2. Display the contents of the C:\Program Files\Canon\  
MultiPASSdirectory and click the right mouse button on  
MONITR32.EXE.  
3. In the displayed menu, click Create Shortcut (a shortcut item  
appears).  
4. Click the plus (+) signs next to the Windows folder, the Start Menu  
folder, and then the Programs folder.  
5. Drag the shortcut item (created in Step 3) to the StartUp folder.  
The MultiPASS Server will automatically be started when you start  
Windows.  
Disconnecting the MultiPASS  
You can disconnect the MultiPASS if you want to use the parallel port  
for another purpose. Before disconnecting your unit, be sure to close the  
MultiPASS Server.  
1. Turn off your computer.  
2. Unplug your computer from all electrical sources.  
3. Unplug the MultiPASS from all electrical sources.  
4. On the back of your computer, remove the cable connector from the  
parallel printer port.  
5. On the MultiPASS, release the wire clips and remove the cable  
connector from the port.  
6. Plug your computer back in to the electrical source.  
8-24 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling the MultiPASS Software  
If you are planning on reinstalling the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, you  
must first uninstall the current installation of the software. When you  
uninstall the software, you remove the MultiPASS Desktop Manager and  
related printer, fax, and scanner drivers. The following items are not  
removed, so that you can reinstall the MultiPASS Desktop Manager at a  
later time and continue to use your data files, address book, cover page  
templates, search keys and so on:  
❍ MultiPASS directory  
❍ Data folders and files (such as Fax Log and Address Book)  
❍ System files shared with other applications  
When uninstalling, you remove the MultiPASS printer and fax drivers,  
and the Desktop Manager software.  
Removing the Printer and Fax Drivers  
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start, and then point to Settings.  
2. On the Settings menu, click Printers.  
3. In the Printers dialog box, click the Canon MultiPASS Printer icon  
and press the Delete key.  
Repeat this step for the Canon MultiPASS Fax icon.  
•
Uninstalling the Desktop Manager  
1. Close the MultiPASS Desktop Manager and all MultiPASS-related  
utilities (such as the Cover Page Designer).  
2. Close the MultiPASS Server. (See page 8-23 for details.)  
3. From the Windows desktop, click Start, point to Settings, and  
choose Control Panel.  
4. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs option.  
Chapter 8  
Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager 8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Highlight Canon MultiPASS Desktop Manager 3.0 and click the  
Add/Remove button.  
6. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Uninstalling the Scan Software (ScanGear)  
1. Click Start, and then point to Settings.  
2. On the Settings menu, click Control Panel.  
3. In Control Panel, double-click Add/Remove Programs.  
4. In Add/Remove Programs Properties dialog box, click Canon  
ScanGear for MultiPASS 4.0, and then click the Add/Remove  
button.  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Completing the Uninstall Process  
Once you have deleted the drivers, the Desktop Manager, and the scan  
software, be sure to restart the computer.  
Reinstalling the Desktop Manager  
When you want to reinstall the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, see your  
Quick Start Guide for details.  
Be sure to restart your computer after uninstalling the Desktop Manager  
and before reinstalling.  
N
8-26 Setup and Other Utilities in the Desktop Manager  
Chapter 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the  
MultiPASS C3500  
9
This chapter describes the routine maintenance required for your  
MultiPASS C3500. It includes:  
❍ MultiPASS guidelines  
❍ Routine maintenance  
❍ Cleaning inside the MultiPASS  
❍ Printing the nozzle check  
❍ Cleaning the BJ cartridge print head  
❍ BJ cartridge guidelines  
❍ Replacing the BJ cartridge  
❍ Replacing a BJ tank in the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
❍ Storing a BJ cartridge  
❍ Transporting the MultiPASS  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MultiPASS Guidelines  
Follow these guidelines to avoid damage to your MultiPASS and harm to  
you or others:  
❍ Place the MultiPASS on a stable surface. Do not use an angled stand.  
Avoid setting the unit in direct sunlight.  
❍ Do not install the MultiPASS near devices that contain magnets or  
generate magnetic fields, such as speakers.  
❍ Do not subject the MultiPASS to strong physical shock or vibration.  
❍ Make sure the area where you use the unit is free from dust.  
❍ Keep the MultiPASS clean. Dust accumulation can prevent the unit  
from operating properly.  
❍ To assure proper electrical contact, make sure the unit is firmly  
plugged in.  
❍ Never pull on the cord to unplug the MultiPASS. Pull on the plug  
itself.  
❍ Do not overload the electrical outlet where the MultiPASS is plugged  
in.  
❍ For your safety, unplug the MultiPASS during electrical storms.  
❍ Lift the MultiPASS from the bottom only. Do not lift the unit by the  
operator panel or any of its trays.  
GRIP HERE  
9-2 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Maintenance  
Your MultiPASS requires little routine maintenance. Follow these  
guidelines to keep your MultiPASS in good operating condition:  
❍ Before you clean the MultiPASS, be sure to print any faxes stored in  
memory.  
❍ Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for  
cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate static charges.  
❍ Be sure to disconnect the power cord before cleaning the unit.  
❍ Lightly wipe the unit’s exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth  
moistened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution.  
❍ Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol or any other organic solvent, as  
it may damage the surface of the MultiPASS.  
Cleaning Inside the MultiPASS  
To prevent ink spots and paper dust from accumulating inside the  
MultiPASS and affecting print quality, clean the unit’s print  
area periodically. Follow these guidelines:  
❍ Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone,  
or any other chemical cleaner to clean the interior of the  
MultiPASS, or you can damage its components.  
❍ Avoid touching the print head or ribbon cable inside the  
MultiPASS.  
DO NOT TOUCH  
THE PRINT HEAD  
DO NOT  
TOUCH  
THE  
RIBBON  
CABLE  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Disconnect the power cord from the MultiPASS before cleaning.  
❍ Open the printer cover by grasping the paper guides and lifting.  
❍ Use a clean, soft, dry, lint-free cloth to remove any ink or paper  
debris from the printer’s interior, especially around the platen.  
Make sure not to touch the cartridge.  
PLATEN  
❍ Check the small black rollers. If they are dirty, clean them with a  
soft, dry cloth.  
❍ When finished, close the printer cover, and plug the MultiPASS back  
in.  
Cleaning the Scanner Components  
Periodically check and clean the scanning components as explained here.  
Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the MultiPASS.  
Open the  
operator panel  
by gently pulling  
it toward you.  
9-4 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clean the  
components.  
SEPARATION GUIDE  
SCANNING GLASS  
SEPARATION ROLLER  
❍ Separation guide  
Wipe with a dry, soft cloth.  
❍ White sheet and scanning glass  
Use a clean, soft, lint-free cloth moistened with water to  
clean the white sheet and scanning glass, then wipe them  
with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.  
❍ Separation roller  
Wipe with a soft, dry clean cloth to clean the rollers.  
If the scanning components are dirty, the documents you send or print  
will also be dirty.  
N
C
Be sure to use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.  
Do not use tissue paper. Dust from the tissue paper causes static  
electricity.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clean the shaded  
areas of the  
❍ Dirt and dust particles that collect on the underside of  
the operation panel also affect the quality of the  
documents you copy or send.  
operator panel  
and the unit.  
❍ Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to wipe up paper dust around  
the rollers.  
When you are  
finished, close the  
operator panel.  
❍ Press the center of the operator panel until it locks into  
place.  
❍ Plug the unit back in.  
9-6 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the Nozzle Check  
Use this test print to check that each print head nozzle is operating  
properly.  
Make sure the MultiPASS is plugged in.  
Press FUNCTION.  
FUNCTION  
Press either of the  
< > buttons until  
NOZZLE CHECK  
NOZZLE CHECK  
appears in the LCD.  
Press  
START/COPY.  
The pattern starts printing.  
When the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge is installed, the pattern includes all  
four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. In the color pattern, you’ll  
notice that lines are missing between the colors. This is normal.  
YELLOW  
MAGENTA  
CYAN  
BLACK  
The following sample shows the Nozzle Check when the optional BC-20  
Black BJ Cartridge is installed.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head  
To maintain the best possible print quality, you need to clean the  
BJ cartridge print head from time to time. Your MultiPASS is  
equipped with a print head cleaning function. If you notice some  
degradation in the print quality, try cleaning the print head.  
Cleaning the print head consumes a small amount of ink. Cleaning too  
often reduces the amount of ink in the BJ cartridge.  
C
Press FUNCTION.  
❍ Make sure the MultiPASS is plugged in.  
FUNCTION  
Press the < or >  
button until  
HEAD  
CLEANING  
HEAD CLEANING  
appears in the  
LCD display.  
Press START/COPY.  
The unit cleans the print head.  
When cleaning ends, the MultiPASS beeps once to let you  
know it is done, and returns to Standby mode.  
❍
❍ Do this five consecutive times if necessary.  
❍ If the problem persists, install a new BJ cartridge.  
9-8 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BJ Cartridge Guidelines  
You can use these cartridges with the MultiPASS:  
❍ BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
Contains the print head unit and two replaceable  
BJ tanks, one color (cyan, magenta, yellow) and  
one black. You can replace the BJ tanks without  
replacing the print head unit when you run out of  
ink.  
❍ BC-20 Black BJ Cartridge  
Contains the print head unit and black ink only. Use  
this optional cartridge when you will be printing  
with black ink only and for fast, five page per minute  
printing. When you run out of ink, you replace the  
complete cartridge.  
❍ BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge  
Contains the print head unit and color and black  
inks. Use this optional cartridge when you want to  
produce photo-realistic color printing. When used  
with Canon’s High Resolution Paper (HR-101), this  
ink produces images comparable to your favorite  
photographs. When you run out of ink, you replace the complete  
cartridge.  
❍ BC-29F Neon BJ Cartridge  
Contains the print head unit and neon color and black inks. Use this  
optional cartridge when you want to add hot new colors to  
everything from your business graphs to stickers for your kids.  
These amazing, bright fluorescent colors make your pictures, graphs,  
and fun images really stand out. When you run out of ink, you  
replace the complete cartridge.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BJ Cartridge and BJ Tank Maintenance  
The most important thing you can do to extend the life of your  
MultiPASS and to ensure optimum print quality is take  
care of the BJ cartridges.  
Spilled ink can stain any surface. Open BJ cartridges and BJ tanks  
carefully, and follow the guidelines presented here to protect against  
C
spilled ink.  
❍ If you are using both the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge and any of the  
optional BJ cartridges, make sure you store the cartridge not being  
used in the Ink Cartridge Storage Box.  
❍ Keep BJ cartridges and BJ tanks in their sealed containers until you  
are ready to use them.  
❍ Do not remove the BJ tanks from the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
unnecessarily. This may cause the ink to clog.  
❍ Make sure both BJ tanks are installed in the BC-21e Color  
BJ Cartridge. Attempting to use the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
with one BJ tank only may cause ink clogging.  
❍ If spilled, the ink is difficult to remove. Therefore, it’s a good idea to  
keep the BJ cartridges and BJ tanks out of the reach of children.  
❍ Do not touch the print head area on the BJ cartridge. Ink may leak  
out and cause stains.  
Hold the BJ cartridge on the sides only. Do not touch the silver plate on  
the bottom of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on the  
side. The metal area may become hot during printing.  
C
HOLD HERE  
PRINT HEAD  
DO NOT TOUCH  
9-10 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Ink  
Canon has more engineers dedicated to creating quality ink for  
providing the best results for output on Bubble Jet printers than any  
other organization. Canon does not prohibit the use of third-party  
inks and the use of third-party inks does not invalidate the product’s  
limited warranty. However, Canon cannot guarantee the quality or  
performance of your printer when you are using inks from other  
suppliers.  
Canon’s limited warranty does not cover damage caused to Canon’s  
Bubble Jet products that is attributable to the use of third party parts or  
supplies, including inks. The limited warranty remains in effect for its  
life once that particular damage has been properly repaired.  
For optimum printing results, Canon recommends that you use the  
Canon BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge or the optional Canon BC-20 Black,  
BC-22e Photo, and BC-29F Neon BJ Cartridges with your MultiPASS.  
N
When replacing BJ tanks in the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge, Canon  
recommends that you use the Canon BCI-21 Color and BCI-21 Black  
BJ Tanks.  
Replacing the BJ Cartridge  
The actual amount of ink that you use will vary depending on the print  
density of a page. If the majority of your output is graphics, you may  
need to change cartridges or tanks more often than when you are  
printing text only. See Appendix A, Specifications, for details on the life  
expectancy of the BJ cartridges.  
You may need to replace the BJ cartridge or a BJ tank when any of the  
following conditions exist:  
❍ You have been using the cartridge for over one year.  
❍ Your printed output is not crisp and clear, and there are gaps in the  
characters (missing dots) even after you have cleaned the print head  
at least five times.  
❍ You see the CHANGE CARTRIDGE message in the LCD.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are using the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge and your output is  
blank, one of the BJ tanks is probably out of ink. See the instructions  
starting on page 9-16 for replacing a BJ tank.  
The following procedure describes how to replace the BC-21e Color  
BJ Cartridge with the optional BC-20 Black BJ Cartridge. Follow the  
instructions in this section to replace an old BJ cartridge or to change  
BJ cartridges when you are switching between the BC-21e and any of the  
optional BJ cartridges.  
You only need to replace the BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge when the print  
head is damaged (or after printing approximately 2000 pages). If one of  
the BJ tanks (either color or black) in your BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge is  
out of ink, see the next section (page 9-16) for instructions on how to  
replace a BJ tank.  
To replace the BJ cartridge, follow these steps:  
Press the  
CARTRIDGE  
button.  
The cartridge holder moves to the center  
of the unit.  
Open the  
printer cover.  
❍ Grasp both sides and lift it up.  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
RIBBON CABLE  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
GUIDE RAIL  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
ROUND SHAFT  
9-12 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not try to move the cartridge holder manually; this may damage the  
unit. If the cartridge holder does not move and the unit beeps several  
times, unplug the MultiPASS C3500 and let it cool for several minutes.  
(The device has an automatic protection mode that prevents it from  
overheating.) After allowing it to cool, plug the unit in again and press  
C
the  
button to move the cartridge holder to the center of  
CARTRIDGE  
the unit.  
Hold the BJ cartridge on the sides only. Do not touch the silver plate on  
the bottom of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on the  
side. The metal area may become hot during printing.  
Lift the green  
❍ Gently pull up on it.  
lock lever on the  
cartridge holder.  
Dispose of  
or store the  
BJ cartridge.  
❍ Dispose of the old BJ cartridge, or store it in the  
Ink Cartridge Storage Box.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Open the  
BJ cartridge  
package.  
❍ Peel the protective foil off the new BJ cartridge’s  
packaging, and remove the cartridge.  
Remove the  
protective  
material  
❍ Carefully lift off the orange cap from the cartridge’s  
print head; then remove the orange tape. Remember  
that spilled ink can stain any surface; protect yourself  
and your work area.  
from the  
BJ cartridge.  
CAP  
TAPE  
Slide the  
BJ cartridge  
straight into the  
cartridge holder.  
❍ Make sure the cartridge label faces you.  
❍ Be careful not to touch the silver plate on the bottom  
of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on  
the side.  
9-14 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Make sure the  
cartridge is  
aligned against  
the back of the  
holder, then  
❍ The BJ cartridge locks into position.  
❍ Do not apply excessive force.  
lower the green  
lock lever.  
The MultiPASS cleans the print head and  
moves the cartridge holder to the home  
position on the right side of the unit.  
Close the  
printer cover,  
and press the  
CARTRIDGE  
button.  
Be sure to set the paper thickness lever for the type of BJ cartridge you  
installed. See page 2-16 for details.  
N
When exchanging one cartridge type for another (such as replacing a  
BC-21e with a BC-20), be sure to select the appropriate Color Model in  
the Graphics tab of the MultiPASS Printer Properties prior to printing  
from a Windows application.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing a BJ Tank in the BC-21e Color  
BJ Cartridge  
If you perform a print operation correctly but the output is blank,  
portions are missing, or colors are very wrong, a BJ tank may be out  
of ink. If the output is still blank after cleaning the print head at least  
five consecutive times, replace the empty BJ tank in the BC-21e Color  
BJ cartridge.  
You leave the BJ cartridge in the MultiPASS when replacing a BJ tank.  
Press the  
CARTRIDGE  
button.  
The cartridge holder then moves to the  
center of the unit.  
Open the  
printer cover.  
❍ Grasp both sides and lift it up.  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
RIBBON CABLE  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
GUIDE RAIL  
DO NOT TOUCH THE  
ROUND SHAFT  
Do not try to move the cartridge holder manually, or you may damage  
the unit. If the cartridge holder does not move and the unit beeps  
several times, unplug the MultiPASS and let it cool for several minutes.  
(The device has an automatic protection mode that prevents it from  
overheating.) After allowing it to cool, plug the unit in again and press  
C
the  
button to move the cartridge holder to the center of the  
CARTRIDGE  
unit.  
9-16 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remove the  
empty BJ tank.  
❍ The color BJ tank is on the left; the black BJ tank is on the  
right.  
❍ Grasp the tab on the top of the tank and pull forward to  
release the BJ tank.  
❍ Then lift the BJ tank up and out of the BJ cartridge unit.  
❍ Dispose of the BJ tank properly. You may want to place it  
in a plastic bag to keep from spilling any residual ink.  
Take the new  
BJ tank out of  
its packaging.  
❍ Remove the orange protective cap.  
❍ Do not touch the bottom of the BJ tank; you may get ink  
on your hands.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slide the new  
BJ tank into  
the empty slot.  
Press firmly on  
the tab on top of  
the new BJ tank  
until it snaps  
into place.  
❍ If you are replacing both tanks, repeat steps 3 through 6  
for the other BJ tank.  
❍ Make sure each tank is properly seated in its slot.  
Close the printer  
cover, and press  
the CARTRIDGE  
button.  
The cartridge holder then moves to the  
home position on the right side of  
the unit.  
Before you unplug the MultiPASS, make sure the BJ cartridge is in the  
home position on the right side. If you unplug the unit while it is  
printing, or move the BJ cartridge from the home position, the cartridge  
will not be capped and may dry out.  
N
9-18 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a BJ Cartridge  
Whenever you unwrap a BJ cartridge, you must either install it in the  
MultiPASS or store it in the Ink Cartridge Storage Box to prevent the  
print head from drying and clogging.  
Open the  
Ink Cartridge  
Storage Box.  
❍ When opening the Ink Cartridge Storage Box, press in on  
the release tab that locks the cover in place.  
Carefully set  
the cartridge in  
the storage box.  
❍ You must insert the cartridge correctly or the storage box  
will not close.  
❍ The protective cap must be removed from the cartridge  
before you set it in the storage box.  
Close the  
storage box.  
❍ Be sure the lid snaps closed.  
Chapter 9  
Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500 9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Whenever you remove a BJ cartridge from the MultiPASS, store the  
cartridge in the storage box (unless you are disposing it).  
N
If you have more than one Ink Cartridge Storage Box, you can hook  
them together. Simply connect them by the slides and grooves on the  
sides of the containers.  
Transporting the MultiPASS  
If you need to transport the MultiPASS, be very careful. DO NOT  
remove the BJ cartridge.  
Make sure the  
BJ cartridge is in  
the home position.  
❍ With the cartridge holder on the right side of the unit,  
tape the BJ cartridge and cartridge holder to the side of  
the unit.  
Disconnect  
all cables.  
❍ Unplug the power cord.  
❍ Disconnect the telephone lines and parallel cable.  
Lower the paper  
rest and remove  
all trays.  
❍ Remove the sending document support.  
❍ Remove the document support and output tray extension.  
9-20 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-22 Maintaining the MultiPASS C3500  
Chapter 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
10  
This chapter contains information to help you solve problems you may  
have when using the MultiPASS C3500. It includes:  
❍ Paper jams  
❍ LCD messages  
❍ Printing problems  
❍ Print quality problems  
❍ Color printing problems  
❍ Paper feeding problems  
❍ Faxing problems  
❍ Telephone problems  
❍ Copying problems  
❍ General problems  
❍ Technical notes  
❍ Memory Clear Report  
If you have a problem with your MultiPASS C3500 and you cannot  
resolve it by referring to the information in this chapter, contact the  
Canon Computer Systems Customer Care Center. See page 1-4 for  
details.  
Canon’s support personnel are trained in the technical support of  
Canon’s products and should be able to help you with your problem. If  
your printer requires service, they can provide you with the telephone  
number of your local Canon Authorized Service Facility (ASF).  
Attempting to repair the MultiPASS yourself may void the limited  
warranty as to that repair. See the limited warranty card for details.  
N
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you need to contact Canon directly, make sure you have the following  
information:  
❍ Product name—MultiPASS C3500  
❍ Serial number  
❍ MultiPASS Desktop Manager version number  
❍ Place of purchase  
❍ Nature of problem  
❍ Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results  
The serial number is located on the label on the back of the unit:  
The version number of MultiPASS Desktop Manager is included in the  
About information. In the Desktop Manager, click Help and then click  
About.  
10-2 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Jams  
On occasion, the document feeding into the MultiPASS or the paper in  
its sheet feeder may misfeed or jam. You can usually clear the problem  
easily.  
You need not unplug the MultiPASS to clear paper jams.  
N
Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
CHECK DOCUMENT  
Press STOP.  
Stops the operation.  
Open the  
operator panel.  
❍ Gently pull the operator panel toward you.  
❍ It opens only slightly.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remove the  
document.  
❍ While holding the operator panel open, remove the  
document.  
❍ Pull it in either direction, but DO NOT force it.  
❍ If a multipage document is loaded, remove the entire  
document from the ADF.  
Close the  
operator panel.  
❍ Gently press the operator panel until it clicks closed.  
❍ Fan and stack the sheets, and replace the stack in the ADF.  
❍ Start your operation again.  
10-4 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jams in the Sheet Feeder  
CLEAR PAPER J AM  
Gently pull any  
jammed paper out  
of the unit.  
Remove the stack  
of paper from the  
sheet feeder.  
❍ Fan the paper, and tap it on a flat surface to even out  
the stack.  
❍ Reinsert the paper into the sheet feeder. Make sure you  
adjust the paper guide to the stack, and that the stack  
does not exceed the limit mark.  
Press STOP  
or RESUME.  
This clears the error message.  
ALARM  
and clear the error message.  
RESUME  
to eject the page  
❍ If the  
light is on, press  
❍ If you are printing from a Windows application, follow  
any instructions displayed on your computer.  
If the paper jam occurred while a fax was being received, the MultiPASS  
will store the fax in memory and print it when the jam is cleared.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LCD Messages  
The following messages are displayed in the LCD when the  
MultiPASS is performing a function or encounters an error.  
The Error Code appears on the Activity Report.  
Message  
Error Code  
Cause  
Action  
AUTO REDIAL  
—
The MultiPASS is  
Wait for the MultiPASS  
to try redialing. If that  
doesn’t work, wait until  
the MultiPASS starts to  
dial the number, then  
press STOP to cancel  
redialing. Try to send  
the document again at a  
later time.  
waiting to redial the  
other party’s number  
because the line was  
busy or the other  
party did not answer  
when you tried to send  
the document.  
BUSY/ NO SIGNAL  
#005/018  
The telephone number  
you dialed is busy.  
Try sending the  
document at a later  
time.  
The fax number dialed  
was incorrect.  
Check the fax number  
and dial again.  
The other party’s fax is  
not working.  
Contact the other party  
and have them check  
their fax.  
The other party is not  
using a G3 machine.  
Contact the other party  
and have them send or  
receive the document  
using a G3 machine.  
The touch tone/rotary  
pulse setting on your  
MultiPASS is incorrect.  
Set your MultiPASS  
to the setting that  
matches your telephone  
line (see page 8-4).  
The receiving fax did  
not answer within 35  
seconds.  
Contact the other party  
and have them check  
their fax. You can try to  
send the document  
manually. For an over-  
seas call, add pauses to  
the registered number.  
CARTRIDGE J AMMED  
Cartridge holder cannot Clear the paper jam or  
move. This is normally  
due to a paper jam.  
whatever is obstructing  
the cartridge holder  
and then press STOP.  
Do not attempt to  
move the cartridge  
holder manually.  
10-6 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Error Code  
Cause  
Action  
CHANGE CARTRIDGE  
#052  
The BJ cartridge is  
empty or its ink has  
dried out.  
Replace the BJ cartridge.  
The unit will then  
print any documents  
received in memory.  
CHECK DOCUMENT  
CHECK PAPER SIZE  
#001  
The document is  
Remove the document  
you are trying to send or  
copy and start again.  
jammed in the ADF.  
The size of the paper  
in the sheet feeder and  
that specified in the  
MultiPASS setup are  
different.  
Set the correct paper  
size in the Receive Fax  
dialog box of the  
Setup Options in the  
MultiPASS Desktop  
Manager (see page 8-7).  
The sheet feeder is  
empty or paper is  
jammed.  
Add paper to the sheet  
feeder or check for a  
jam. Then try to print  
again.  
There is a sheet of  
paper in the manual  
feed slot.  
Make sure there is no  
paper in the manual  
feed slot when you are  
receiving a fax.  
CHECK PRINTER  
—
There may be an  
Check for a paper clip,  
paper jam, or the plastic  
orange cap off the BJ  
cartridge. Press STOP  
and try your operation  
again.  
obstruction that is not  
allowing the cartridge  
mechanism to move  
right or left.  
The BJ cartridge may be Press STOP. Reinstall  
defective.  
the cartridge and try  
your operation again.  
In either case, if the  
error does not clear, try  
unplugging the unit.  
Wait several minutes,  
then plug it back in.  
Also, try installing a new  
BJ cartridge.  
CLEAR PAPER J AM  
—
—
There is a paper jam  
or the sheet feeder is  
empty.  
Remove any paper from  
the sheet feeder. Clear  
the paper jam (see page  
10-5). Then reload paper  
in the sheet feeder. Press  
RESUME or STOP.  
COMMUNICATING  
PLEASE WAIT  
You tried to send a fax  
using Manual mode  
when the MultiPASS  
was already sending  
a fax from memory.  
Wait until the fax is  
sent, or use memory  
sending.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Error Code  
Cause  
Action  
DIALING  
—
The MultiPASS is  
dialing the receiving  
fax machine.  
Press STOP if you  
want to cancel the  
transmission.  
DOC TOO LONG  
#003  
It took more than 32  
minutes to send or  
copy a document.  
Divide the document  
and send or copy each  
part separately.  
It took more than 32  
minutes to receive a  
document.  
Contact the other party.  
Have them divide the  
document and send  
each part separately.  
The document is longer Use a copy machine to  
than 39.4 inches (1 m). make a reduced copy of  
the document and send  
the copy.  
DOCUMENT READY  
ECM RX  
—
—
The document in the  
Send the fax, scan the  
ADF is ready for faxing, document, or make the  
scanning, or copying.  
copy.  
The MultiPASS is  
receiving a fax  
using ECM.  
ECM transmissions may  
take longer than normal  
transmissions. Turn  
off ECM if you need to  
receive quickly, or if you  
know your local lines  
are in good condition.  
ECM TX  
—
The MultiPASS is  
sending a fax using  
ECM.  
ECM transmissions may  
take longer than normal  
transmissions. Turn off  
ECM if you need to  
transmit quickly, or if  
you know your local  
lines are in good  
condition.  
HANG UP PHONE  
INSTALL BC-2 0 / 2 1  
—
—
The telephone is  
off hook.  
Place the telephone  
properly into its cradle.  
The BC-22e or BC-29F Remove the BC-22e or  
BJ Cartridge is installed, BC-29F BJ Cartridge  
so the MultiPASS cannot and install the BC-21e  
print any received faxes, or BC-20 BJ Cartridge.  
or make copies.  
INSTALL BC-2 1  
LOAD PAPER  
—
—
The BC-20, BC-22e,  
Remove the BC-20,  
or BC-29F BJ Cartridge BC-22e, or BC-29F  
is installed.  
BJ Cartridge and install  
the BC-21e BJ Cartridge.  
The MultiPASS is out  
of paper (the sheet  
feeder is empty).  
Load paper in the sheet  
feeder. Make sure the  
stack does not exceed  
the limit mark. Then  
press START/COPY.  
10-8 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Error Code  
Cause  
Action  
MEMORY FULL  
#037  
The memory of the  
MultiPASS is full  
Print out any documents  
that are stored in  
memory. Then start the  
operation again.  
because it has received  
too many documents,  
or a very long or  
detailed document.  
Memory is full because Divide the document  
you tried to send too  
many pages at once,  
or a very long or  
and send each part  
separately.  
detailed document.  
MEMORY FULL  
PLEASE WAIT  
—
The MultiPASS is  
sending a fax and its  
memory is full.  
If sending a fax, the  
MultiPASS continues to  
send the fax as memory  
becomes available.  
MEMORY USED nn%  
NO ANSW ER  
—
Shows the percentage of If you need more space,  
memory currently in use. print or send any  
documents in memory.  
#005  
#012  
#022  
#025  
The receiving fax  
machine does not  
answer.  
Make sure you dialed  
the correct number.  
Try again later.  
NO RX PAPER  
The other party’s fax is  
out of paper or its  
memory is full.  
Contact the other party  
and have them install  
paper in their fax.  
NO TEL #  
The one-touch or coded Register the number  
speed dialing number  
has not been registered.  
(see page 3-14).  
NOT AVAILABLE NOW  
In manual sending, you Use regular dialing.  
entered a speed dialing  
number that is assigned  
to a group.  
PHOTO INK USED  
PLEASE WAIT  
—
—
The BC-22e Photo BJ  
Cartridge is installed  
in the MultiPASS.  
You must change this  
cartridge to copy or  
receive a fax.  
The MultiPASS is  
warming up.  
Wait until the date and  
Receive Mode appear in  
the LCD display, then  
begin.  
PUT IN CARTRIDGE  
—
The BJ cartridge is  
not properly installed.  
Make sure the BJ  
cartridge is installed  
correctly and the green  
lock lever is down.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Error Code  
Cause  
Action  
REC. PAPER J AM  
#009  
The MultiPASS has no  
Add paper or clear the  
paper in its sheet feeder, jam, then press STOP.  
or has a paper jam.  
If a document was  
received in memory,  
the unit will automa-  
tically print it from  
memory.  
RECEIVED IN FILE  
—
—
The computer was  
off and a document  
was received in the  
memory of the  
Turn the computer on  
to upload the file to the  
Desktop Manager or  
press FUNCTION then  
select FILE PRINT from  
the menu to print the  
document.  
MultiPASS.  
REC’D IN MEMORY  
The paper or ink ran out, Add paper to the sheet  
or a paper jam occurred, feeder, change the  
so the MultiPASS  
received the document  
in memory.  
BJ cartridge, or clear  
the paper jam. Press  
STOP to clear the error  
message. The MultiPASS  
automatically prints the  
document stored in  
memory.  
START AGAIN  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
TALK  
—
—
—
An error has occurred  
in the phone line or in  
the system.  
Start the procedure  
again from the  
beginning.  
You pressed the STOP  
button to cancel the  
current operation.  
Resume operation.  
The MultiPASS is set  
for Fax/Tel mode and  
you are receiving a  
telephone call.  
Answer the call.  
TX/ RX CANCELLED  
—
—
You pressed STOP to  
Try sending again.  
cancel the transmission.  
TX/ RX NO. nnnn  
When the MultiPASS  
sends or receives a fax,  
it assigns it a unique  
identification number  
(nnnn).  
Write the number down  
if you’ll need it later.  
10-10 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The ALARM light  
comes on and the  
MultiPASS beeps  
while printing  
The MultiPASS may have a  
paper jam.  
Clear any paper jams. See  
page 10-3.  
If the MultiPASS has no  
paper jam, unplug it, wait  
5 seconds, then plug it in again.  
If the problem is fixed, the  
ALARM light will be off, the  
BJ cartridge will move to its  
home position, and the LCD  
display will show the date and  
Receive Mode (Standby Mode).  
If the ALARM light stays on,  
call the Customer Care Center.  
See page 1-4.  
Data from computer is  
not printed  
The power cord may not  
be plugged in securely.  
Check that the power cord  
is plugged securely into the  
unit and into the wall outlet.  
If the MultiPASS is plugged  
into a power strip, make sure  
the power strip is plugged in  
and turned on.  
The interface cable may not  
be securely connected to the  
MultiPASS and the computer.  
Check the interface cable  
connection.  
The interface cable may  
not be the correct type.  
Make sure the cable is a  
bi-directional parallel interface  
cable less than 6.6 feet in  
length.  
The MultiPASS may have been  
Unplug the MultiPASS and  
plugged in or the computer may turn off the computer. Plug  
have been turned on when you the unit back in and turn  
connected the interface cable.  
the computer back on again.  
The orange tape may not be  
Be sure to remove the tape  
removed from the BJ cartridge. from the BJ cartridge when  
you install it. See page 9-14.  
The BJ cartridge may not  
have been installed properly.  
Make sure the BJ cartridge is  
installed correctly. See page  
9-11.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Data from computer is  
not printed (continued)  
The print head unit may need  
cleaning.  
Clean the print head. See  
page 9-8.  
The BJ cartridge may need to be Replace the BJ cartridge. See  
replaced. (It may be out of ink.) page 9-11.  
The application you are  
printing from may not be  
set up properly.  
Check the computer and the  
application to make sure they  
are configured correctly.  
Make sure your application has  
the MultiPASS selected as the  
printer.  
The MultiPASS may not be set  
as the default printer or the  
selected printer.  
Make sure the MultiPASS is  
selected as the default or  
current printer.  
Make sure the MultiPASS Server  
is running.  
The printer driver may be  
configured with the wrong  
port.  
Make sure the MultiPASS  
printer driver is configured  
to use the computer’s  
parallel port. See page 2-7.  
The computer’s parallel port  
may be disabled.  
Make sure your computer’s  
CMOS has the primary  
parallel port set to LPT1.  
(Your computer should have  
a Setup Program that lets you  
do this.) See your computer’s  
documentation.  
Another hardware device or  
software application is  
attempting to communicate  
with the same parallel port  
to which the MultiPASS is  
connected.  
Disconnect the peripheral  
device and uninstall or remove  
any software associated with  
this device and any software  
communicating with the  
parallel port.  
BJ cartridge moves,  
ink does not appear  
The BJ cartridge or a BJ tank  
may not be installed properly.  
Make sure the BJ cartridge  
and its BJ tank(s) are properly  
installed. Make sure the orange  
tape is removed from the print  
head area (see page 9-14).  
The nozzles on the BJ  
cartridge may be clogged.  
Perform the print head  
cleaning procedure (see page  
9-8) and print the nozzle check  
(see page 9-7).  
A BJ tank may be empty  
(BC-21e Color BJ cartridge).  
Check the BJ tanks and  
replace them if necessary.  
10-12 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The printed output is  
not what you expected  
There may be a communication Make sure the computer  
problem between the MultiPASS and the application are  
and your computer.  
configured correctly for  
communicating with the  
MultiPASS.  
The interface cable may not  
be securely connected to the  
MultiPASS and the computer.  
Check the interface cable’s  
connections.  
The interface cable may not  
be the correct type.  
Make sure you are using a  
bi-directional parallel interface  
cable that is less than 6 feet  
(2 m) long.  
You may not be using the  
correct printer driver.  
Make sure you have  
selected the MultiPASS  
printer in your application.  
Another hardware device or  
software application is  
attempting to communicate  
with the same parallel port  
to which the MultiPASS is  
connected.  
Disconnect the peripheral  
device and uninstall or remove  
any software associated with  
this device and any software  
communicating with the  
parallel port.  
You may not have the best  
media type selected.  
Try selecting Coated Paper for  
the Media Type rather than  
Plain Paper. See page 2-9.  
Previous software settings  
may not be cleared.  
Make sure the MultiPASS  
was cleared of the previous  
software settings before the  
print job started. See the  
application’s documentation.  
Printout does not  
match paper size  
Paper may not be loaded  
and aligned correctly in  
the sheet feeder.  
Make sure the paper is loaded  
and aligned correctly. See  
page 2-19.  
The application’s page  
size and margin settings  
may be incorrect.  
Make sure the paper size and  
margin set in your application  
are correct for the paper in the  
sheet feeder.  
The selected printer driver  
may be incorrect.  
Make sure you select the  
MultiPASS printer in your  
application.  
The MultiPASS suspends  
print after every line is  
printed  
The print head may have  
Stop your print operation  
become too hot. If this happens, and wait several minutes to  
the MultiPASS may be slowing allow the unit to cool. Then  
its print speed at the end of each start your operation again.  
line to protect the print head.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Print jobs vanish or you  
are printing garbage  
Another Windows application  
on your computer may be  
trying to communicate with  
the printer port the MultiPASS  
Server is using. This conflict  
can result in strange printing  
behavior.  
Uninstall or remove the  
software application.  
Make sure the MultiPASS  
Server is loaded.  
If the MultiPASS Server icon  
does not appear on the bottom  
of your screen, turn on the  
MultiPASS Server.  
The printout curls  
Your pages may include a  
large amount of ink.  
Remove each sheet as it is  
printed. Allow it to dry, then  
roll it in the opposite direction  
of the curl.  
Your computer indicates  
a device time-out  
A device time-out occurs when Make sure the MultiPASS is  
the computer sends data to the plugged in, and that its  
MultiPASS, but the MultiPASS  
does not respond. The  
interface cable is securely  
attached to the unit and to  
the computer. Clear any paper  
MultiPASS may be unplugged,  
not connected to the computer, jams, and make sure paper is  
or have a paper jam.  
loaded properly in the sheet  
feeder.  
Print Quality Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Print quality is not what  
you expect; print is not  
The paper you are using  
may not be supported by  
Make sure you are using  
the recommended paper  
(see page A-2).  
clear; splashed or missing the unit.  
dots, white streaks  
You may be printing on the  
wrong side of the paper.  
Some paper has a right side  
for printing. If the print quality  
is not as clear as you would like  
it to be, try turning the paper  
over and printing on the other  
side.  
The print head nozzles  
may be clogged.  
Clean the print head (see  
page 9-8); repeat cleaning  
if necessary. If print quality is  
not recovered after executing  
the cleaning five times, replace  
the BJ cartridge.  
10-14 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Print quality is not what  
you expect (continued)  
BJ cartridge may be  
installed incorrectly.  
Make sure the BJ cartridge  
and/or BJ tanks are installed  
correctly.  
A BJ tank in the BC-21e  
Color BJ Cartridge may be  
empty.  
Replace BJ tanks as necessary.  
See page 9-16.  
The print head may be  
worn out.  
The BJ cartridge may need  
to be replaced. Replace it with  
a new one (see page 9-11).  
Output appears jagged  
The resolution selected via  
printer driver may be  
Draft (180 dpi).  
Check your printer driver to  
see what Print Quality you  
have selected. Printing in Draft  
mode will give the output a  
jagged look. Changing the  
Print Quality to Standard  
should correct this problem.  
Fonts do not print as  
smoothly rounded  
characters  
Bitmapped fonts designed  
for dot matrix printers do  
not print smoothly rounded  
characters when used with  
high resolution printers like  
the MultiPASS.  
Make sure you installed an  
outline font manager, such  
®
as Adobe Type Manager or  
®
Bitstream Facelift, or that  
®
you are choosing a TrueType  
font.  
Certain MS fonts, such as  
MS Serif, will print jagged.  
Choose another font.  
Output is faint  
You may be using Draft  
print quality or Fine mode.  
Try using Standard print  
quality.  
Printing takes too  
much time  
You may be using Fine  
mode.  
Turn off Fine mode.  
Blurred or smudged ink  
The print medium you are  
using may not be supported  
by the MultiPASS.  
Try a different paper type;  
however, use only print media  
specified in Appendix A,  
Specifications.  
You may be printing on  
the wrong side of the sheet.  
Paper has a right side for  
printing. If the print quality is  
not as clear as you would like,  
try turning the paper over and  
printing on the other side.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color Printing Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Printer prints only in  
black (you are printing  
from an application that  
supports color printing  
but your output is  
The MultiPASS printer driver  
may not be selected.  
Make sure the MultiPASS is  
the default printer in your  
application.  
The printer driver may not be  
selecting color.  
Check that you selected Color  
in the Color Model dialog box  
of the Graphics tab of the  
printer driver.  
black ink only)  
The color BJ cartridge may  
not be installed or may not  
be working properly.  
Print the Nozzle Check pattern  
to make sure the BC-21e Color  
BJ Cartridge is installed and  
firing correctly.  
If a BJ tank is empty, replace it.  
The print head unit may  
need cleaning.  
Clean the print head (see  
page 9-8).  
The application you are using  
may not support color  
printing.  
Make sure your application  
supports color printing.  
Colors are broken or  
uneven  
The print mode may be  
wrong.  
If you are printing high  
density graphics on plain  
paper, set the Media Type to  
Coated Paper on the Paper tab  
of the printer driver.  
If you are printing a thin  
line with a nonprimary  
color, your software may  
be telling the unit to place  
a color every other dot,  
with white in between.  
Choose cyan, yellow,  
magenta, or black instead.  
Colors print incorrectly  
The MultiPASS printer  
driver may not be selected.  
Make sure the MultiPASS  
is the default printer in your  
application.  
The driver may not be  
selecting color.  
Check that you selected  
Color in the Color Model  
dialog box in the Graphics tab  
of the printer driver.  
The driver may not be  
selecting the right media.  
Make sure the correct paper  
type is set in the driver.  
Colors are missing  
The print head may need to  
be cleaned.  
Clean the print head (see  
page 9-8).  
10-16 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Colors in a line are  
uneven or different  
from previous lines  
The print settings may not  
be the best for the images  
you are printing.  
If you are printing high  
density color graphics on  
plain paper, change the Media  
Type setting from Plain Paper  
to Coated Paper.  
Be sure to experiment with  
different settings and different  
types of paper.  
Hue changes  
The print nozzles may be  
clogged with dust.  
Clean the print head. See  
page 9-8.  
A BJ tank may be empty.  
Replace empty BJ tanks as  
needed. See page 9-16.  
Blue looks like purple  
Blue prints out as purple  
Within the MultiPASS printer  
driver, selecting Match (screen  
match) in the Color Adjustment  
dialog box of the Custom Setting  
window will result in a lighter  
blue. If you are not using  
screen matching, decreasing  
the amount of magenta by 30%  
produces a royal blue.  
because of the difference in  
color technology used by  
the screen and printer; the  
screen uses RGB (Red, Green,  
Blue) color and the MultiPASS  
uses CMYK (Cyan, Magenta,  
Yellow, Black) color. Due to the  
technology differences, when  
cyan and magenta are mixed  
together, blue prints dark blue  
or purple compared to the screen.  
If you are just looking for a  
nice blue color, try cyan. It  
prints beautifully and fast  
and is available in almost all  
applications that support color.  
Color images are  
missing some detail  
Check to see if your MultiPASS If so, change the Media Type  
printer driver is set to Plain  
Paper, Color Mode, and  
Halftoning=Pattern.  
setting from Plain Paper to  
Coated Paper.  
Paper Feeding Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Paper does not load  
The sheet feeder may contain  
too many sheets.  
Make sure the stack of paper  
in the sheet feeder does not  
exceed the limit mark.  
Paper may not be inserted  
correctly.  
Make sure the stack of paper  
is inserted into the sheet feeder,  
and the paper guide is adjusted  
correctly.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Paper is loaded skewed  
(printing is skewed)  
Paper may not be stacked  
correctly in the sheet feeder.  
Make sure the stack of paper  
is straight in the sheet feeder.  
Make sure the right side of the  
stack of paper is aligned against  
the right side of the sheet  
feeder and the paper guide is  
aligned against the left side.  
Make sure the paper exit path  
is clear.  
Multiple sheets load  
into unit at the same  
time  
Paper may not be stacked  
correctly.  
Make sure paper is installed  
correctly in the sheet feeder.  
Sheets of paper may be  
sticking together.  
Be sure to fan the stack of  
paper before placing it in the  
sheet feeder.  
Too much paper may be  
stacked in the sheet feeder.  
Make sure the paper rest is  
extended and the paper is  
stacked correctly in the sheet  
feeder.  
Make sure the stack of paper  
does not exceed the limit mark.  
If necessary, remove a few  
sheets from the sheet feeder.  
Do not stack more than  
approximately 100 sheets of  
plain paper in the sheet feeder.  
Do not force the stack into the  
sheet feeder.  
Different types of paper may  
be stacked in the sheet feeder.  
Load just one type of paper.  
Make sure you are loading  
paper that matches the  
specifications of this unit.  
See Appendix A, Specifications,  
for details.  
Transparencies or back  
print film do not feed  
correctly  
The film may not be loaded  
correctly.  
Make sure you load no more  
than 50 sheets of transparencies  
or 10 sheets of back print film  
in the sheet feeder.  
10-18 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Repeated paper jams  
occur  
The paper you are using may  
be causing the jams.  
Fan the paper before stacking  
it in the sheet feeder. This  
keeps the sheets of paper from  
sticking together.  
Check that the paper you are  
using and your printing  
environment are within the  
specifications of the unit. See  
Appendix A, Specifications,  
for details.  
Envelopes do not load  
Envelopes may not be  
loaded correctly.  
Make sure the envelopes are  
loaded properly. (See page  
2-25.)  
Make sure there are no more  
than 10 envelopes in the sheet  
feeder.  
You may need to choose  
the envelope setting in  
your printer driver.  
Make sure you select the  
correct envelope size in the  
Paper Setting dialog box in  
your printer driver.  
Envelopes may not match  
specifications for this unit.  
Envelopes must be U.S.  
Commercial number 10  
(9.5 × 4.1 inches) or  
European DL envelopes  
(220 × 110 mm).  
Faxing Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Cannot send a  
document  
The MultiPASS may have  
overheated.  
Unplug the unit and let it  
cool for several minutes. Try  
sending again.  
The MultiPASS may not be  
set for the type of telephone  
line in use (pulse/tone).  
If you have a pulse line, be  
sure the MultiPASS is set  
for pulse dialing.  
The document may not  
have been fed correctly  
into the MultiPASS.  
Remove the document, stack  
it, and feed it into the unit  
correctly (see page 1-13).  
Make sure the operator panel  
is closed.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Cannot send a  
document (continued)  
The one-touch or coded  
speed dialing number you  
used may not be registered  
for the feature you want  
to use.  
Check the one-touch or coded  
speed dialing button and be  
sure it is registered correctly.  
The other party’s fax may be  
out of paper.  
Call the other party and ask  
them to make sure paper is  
installed.  
There may be other documents Allow time for the current  
being sent from memory.  
document to finish sending.  
The telephone line may not  
be working properly.  
Make sure there is a dial tone  
when you lift the telephone.  
If not, contact the local  
telephone company.  
The receiving fax machine may Make sure the receiving fax  
not be a G3 fax machine.  
machine is compatible with  
the MultiPASS (which is a G3  
fax machine).  
Images on faxes  
received from the  
MultiPASS are  
The receiving fax machine may Check the MultiPASS by  
not be working properly.  
making a copy. If the copy is  
clear, the problem may be in  
the receiving fax machine.  
spotted or dirty  
The document may not be  
properly inserted in the  
ADF.  
Remove the document and  
feed it correctly into the  
ADF. See page 1-13.  
Cannot send or receive  
using Error Correction  
Mode (ECM)  
The other party’s fax may  
not support ECM.  
Some fax units do not  
support ECM transmission.  
If the other party’s fax does  
not support ECM trans-  
mission, then the document is  
sent in the normal mode  
without error checking.  
Errors occur frequently  
The phone line may be in  
Lower the transmission speed.  
See the Advanced: Send Fax  
dialog box (page 8-5) and the  
Advanced: Receive Fax dialog  
box (page 8-9).  
while sending or receiving poor condition, or you may  
have a poor connection.  
The sending fax machine may  
not be functioning properly.  
The sending fax machine  
usually determines the fax’s  
quality. Call the sender and  
have them make sure the top  
cover and scanning glass on  
their fax machine are clean.  
10-20 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Cannot receive a  
fax automatically  
The MultiPASS may not be  
set to receive automatically.  
To receive faxes automatically,  
the Receive mode must be  
Fax Only or Fax/Tel mode.  
The MultiPASS may have a  
document stored in memory.  
Print out any document  
stored in memory. (See  
page 5-5.)  
The MultiPass Desktop  
Manager may have  
received the fax.  
Check the In Box in the  
Desktop Manager.  
An error may have occured  
during reception.  
Check the LCD for an error  
message. See page 10-6.  
The sheet feeder may be  
empty.  
Make sure paper is loaded  
in the sheet feeder.  
The telephone line may not  
be connected properly.  
Make sure all phone line  
connections are secure.  
The MultiPASS is printing  
a document.  
The incoming fax is stored  
in memory and will print  
when the print job is  
complete.  
The MultiPASS does  
not switch automatically  
between telephone and  
fax transmissions  
The MultiPASS may not  
be in Fax/Tel mode.  
For the MultiPASS to switch  
automatically between  
telephone and fax reception,  
the Receive mode must be  
set to Fax/Tel mode.  
There may be a document  
in memory.  
Make sure you have printed  
out any documents in memory.  
An error may have occured  
during reception.  
Check the LCD for an error  
message. See page 10-6.  
The sheet feeder may be  
empty.  
Make sure paper is loaded in  
the sheet feeder.  
The sending fax may not  
send the CNG signal that  
tells the MultiPASS that the  
incoming signal is a fax.  
Some fax units cannot send  
the CNG signal that tells your  
MultiPASS the incoming signal  
is from a fax. In such cases,  
you will have to receive the  
document manually.  
Cannot receive a  
document manually  
You may have pressed  
START/COPY after hanging  
up the telephone.  
Always press START/COPY  
before hanging up the  
telephone. Do not press  
START/COPY after you hang  
up the telephone; this will  
disconnect the call.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Print quality is poor  
You may not be using the  
correct type of paper.  
Be sure you are using paper  
that meets the paper  
requirements for the  
MultiPASS (see page A-1).  
The print head may need  
to be cleaned.  
Clean the print head  
(see page 9-8).  
The sending party may be  
having a problem.  
Make a copy on your  
MultiPASS. If the image is  
OK, then your MultiPASS is  
operating properly. Contact  
the other party and have  
them check their machine.  
Error correction (ECM)  
may be disabled.  
Make sure Error correction  
(ECM) is set to on in the  
Advanced: Receive fax  
dialog box of the Desktop  
Manager.  
Faxes do not print  
The BJ cartridge may not  
be installed correctly.  
Be sure to remove the orange  
tape from the BJ cartridge  
before you install it in the  
MultiPASS (see page 9-14).  
Make sure the BJ cartridge is  
installed correctly (see page  
9-11).  
The print head may need  
cleaning.  
Clean the print head several  
times (see page 9-8).  
The BJ cartridge may need  
to be replaced.  
Try another BJ cartridge.  
The MultiPASS may have a  
BC-22e Photo or BC-29F  
Neon BJ Cartridge installed.  
Faxes will not print when  
these cartridges are installed.  
Replace the cartridge with a  
BC-21e Color or BC-20 Black  
BJ Cartridge.  
Fax images print blotched The telephone lines may  
ECM sending/receiving should  
eliminate such problems.  
However, if the telephone  
lines are in poor condition,  
you may have to try again.  
or uneven  
be in poor condition, or  
you may have a bad  
connection.  
The other party’s fax may  
have a problem.  
Remember, the sending fax  
usually determines document  
quality. Be sure the other  
party’s top cover and scanning  
glass are clean.  
10-22 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Telephone Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
You cannot dial  
The telephone line may  
not be connected properly.  
Be sure the telephone line is  
correctly connected to the  
MultiPASS (see your Setup  
Guide).  
The unit may not be getting  
power.  
Make sure the power cord is  
connected to the MultiPASS  
and to an AC outlet; make  
sure the AC outlet has power.  
The MultiPASS may not  
be set for the type of  
telephone line in use  
(pulse/tone).  
If you have a pulse line, be  
sure the MultiPASS is set for  
pulse dialing (see page 8-4).  
The phone disconnects  
while you are talking  
on the line  
The MultiPASS may not be  
plugged in properly.  
Make sure the MultiPASS  
is plugged in correctly.  
If the MultiPASS is in  
Disable the Silent Receive  
option on the Receive Fax  
tab of the Desktop Manager.  
Answer Machine Mode and  
Silent Receive is enabled,  
the unit will switch to fax  
receive mode when it detects  
a period of silence.  
Copying Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The MultiPASS will not  
make a copy  
The MultiPASS may have a  
BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
installed, and its black BJ tank  
may be empty.  
Replace the empty BJ tank.  
See page 9-16.  
The MultiPASS may have a  
BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge  
or BC-29F Neon BJ Cartridge  
installed.  
The MultiPASS will not make  
copies when the BC-22e  
Photo BJ Cartridge or the  
BC-29F Neon BJ Cartridge  
is installed. Replace the  
cartridge with a BC-21e  
Color BJ Cartridge or BC-20  
Black BJ Cartridge.  
The telephone may be off hook. Make sure the telephone is  
in its cradle.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The MultiPASS will not  
make a copy (continued)  
The document may not be  
loaded correctly.  
Make sure a document is set  
in the ADF and the LCD  
displays DOCUMENT READY.  
Make sure the operator panel  
is closed.  
The BJ cartridge is not  
installed.  
Make sure the BJ cartridge is  
installed correctly.  
The MultiPASS may not be  
be operating properly.  
Try to print a document from  
your computer.  
MEMORY FULL  
The MultiPASS’s memory  
is full.  
Print out any faxes stored in  
memory. Then print one copy  
at a time.  
appears in the LCD  
when you are making  
multiple copies  
General Problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The MultiPASS has  
no power  
The power cord may not be  
securely plugged into the unit.  
Make sure the power cord is  
plugged securely into the unit  
and into a wall outlet.  
If the power cord is connected  
to a power strip, make sure the  
strip is connected to an outlet  
and turned on.  
The power cord may not be  
supplying power.  
Check the power cord by  
substituting another, or by  
using a voltmeter to test it for  
continuity.  
The MultiPASS will not  
print reports  
The MultiPASS may have a  
BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
installed, and its black BJ  
tank may be empty.  
Replace the empty BJ tank.  
See page 9-16.  
The BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge Remove the BC-22e and install  
may be installed.  
the BC-21e Color or BC-20  
Black BJ Cartridge.  
Nothing appears in the  
LCD display  
The MultiPASS may not be  
receiving power.  
Check the plug and be sure it is  
firmly plugged into the power  
connector and the wall outlet.  
If the display remains blank,  
unplug the MultiPASS, wait five  
seconds, then plug it in again.  
10-24 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
Using Other Bi-directional Devices  
If you have another bi-directional device (such as a Windows Printing  
System printer or a later-model laser printer) installed on your computer  
and you are attempting to use the same port on which you have the  
MultiPASS connected, you may experience undesirable results when  
printing a document.  
Be sure the MultiPASS is the only device configured to a particular port.  
The MultiPASS operates properly only with a dedicated parallel port.  
MultiPASS Hardware Cannot Initialize  
If you see the following screen during the installation process, try to  
solve the problem by following the procedures below.  
1. Confirm that the MultiPASS unit is plugged into a power source and  
that the date and Receive Mode are displayed in the LCD before  
turning on the PC or starting Windows. It is recommended that the  
MultiPASS be connected directly to an AC outlet and not a power  
strip to which your computer is connected.  
2. Check both ends of the printer cable—at the computer and at the  
MultiPASS—to confirm that the cable is securely fastened.  
3. Confirm that the MultiPASS is configured for the correct parallel  
port in the Details tab of the Printer Properties. In addition, confirm  
that there are no port conflicts in the Device Manager tab of the  
System Properties.  
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting 10-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Remove any pass-through devices, switch boxes, zip drives, tape  
backups, docking stations, scanners, and any software associated  
with these products. The software drivers for these products are  
customarily executed from the Load and Run lines of the computer’s  
Win.ini or the StartUp Group. Please refer to the product’s  
manufacturer for information on how to properly remove the  
hardware and software.  
5. If the above procedures do not resolve the problem, please call the  
Canon Computer Systems Customer Care Center. See page 1-4 for  
details.  
If the error message clears, be sure to start up your system and check the  
MultiPASS. The problem may be cleared.  
N
Memory Clear Report  
The Memory Clear Report summarizes the documents that were cleared  
from memory when a power failure occurred. This report is generated  
automatically.  
❍ If you experience a power failure, any documents stored in memory  
will be lost.  
❍ When you turn on the MultiPASS after power is restored, the  
MultiPASS automatically prints out a list of documents that were  
stored in the memory at the time of the power failure.  
*****************************  
*** MEMORY CLEAR REPORT ***  
*****************************  
MEMORY FILES DELETED  
TX/RX NO  
0079  
MODE  
CONECTION TEL/ID  
3122685700  
PGS. SET TIME  
ST. TIME  
TRANSMIT  
RECEIVE  
1
2
08/03 12:54  
08/04 12:59  
0080  
337582111  
10-26 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
A
Printing Specifications  
Printing Method  
Bubble Jet ink on-demand  
Paper Handling  
Automatic feed  
Manual feed  
Sheet Feeder Capacity – Auto Feed Only  
Maximum thickness of stacked paper: 0.4 inches (10 mm)  
Plain paper  
(20 lb or 75 g/m2)  
Glossy photo paper  
Banner paper  
Brilliant white paper  
High resolution paper  
T-shirt transfers  
Bubble Jet paper  
Fabric sheets  
Approx. 100 sheets (0.4" stack)  
1 sheet  
1 sheet (2 to 6 long)  
Approx. 100 sheets (0.4" stack)  
Approx. 80 sheets (0.4" stack)  
1 sheet  
Approx. 100 sheets (0.4" stack)  
1 sheet  
Transparencies  
Back print film  
Envelopes  
50 sheets  
10 sheets  
15 envelopes (U.S. Commercial  
number 10 or European DL)  
Paper Size  
Letter  
Legal  
A4  
A5  
B5  
8.5 in × 11 in  
8.5 in × 14 in  
210 mm × 297 mm  
148 × 210 mm  
182 × 257 mm  
Banner  
8.5 in × 11 in sheets;  
maximum length 66 in (1676 mm)  
U.S. Commercial  
number 10 envelope  
European DL envelope  
9.5 in × 4.1 in  
220 mm × 110 mm  
Appendix A  
Specifications A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Media Type  
Glossy photo paper  
Banner paper  
Recommended  
Canon Glossy Photo Paper GP-201  
Canon Banner Paper  
Brilliant white paper  
High resolution paper  
T-shirt transfers  
Greeting cards  
Canon Brilliant White Paper  
Canon High Resolution Paper HR-101  
Canon T-Shirt Transfers TR-101  
Canon Greeting Cards GC-101  
Canon Bubble Jet Paper (water-resistant)  
LC-301  
Bubble Jet paper  
Fabric sheets  
Fabric Sheet FS-101 for Canon Bubble  
Jet printers  
Transparencies  
Back print film  
High gloss film  
Envelopes  
Canon CF-102 Transparencies  
Canon Back Print Film BF-102  
Canon High Gloss Film HG-101  
Commercial number 10 or European DL  
Paper Weight  
17 to 30 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)  
Print Speed  
BC-21e Color BJ  
Cartridge  
Draft mode—up to 2.5 ppm  
Standard mode—up to 1.4 ppm  
Fine mode—up to 0.23 ppm  
BC-20 Black  
BJ Cartridge  
Draft mode—up to 6.5 ppm  
Standard mode—up to 3.6 ppm  
Print Width  
Maximum  
8 inches (205 mm)  
Line Feed Speed  
Approximately 150 ms/line at 2/6-inch line feeds  
Resolution  
Color  
Black  
720 × 360 dpi  
720 × 360 dpi (with Smoothing)  
A-2 Specifications  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printable Area—Papers  
The shaded portion in the following figure shows the printing area for  
paper. The table lists the minimum margins.  
All Except Fabric Sheet  
Fabric Sheet  
Margin Inches mm  
Margin Inches mm  
L
R
T
B
0.25  
0.25  
0.12  
0.65  
6.4  
6.4  
3.0  
16.5  
L
R
T
B
0.25  
1.35  
1.62  
1.10  
6.4  
34.4  
41.1  
27.9  
Printable Area—Envelopes  
The shaded portion in the following figure shows the printing area for a  
COM10 envelope. The table lists the minimum margins.  
Margin Inches mm  
L
R
T
B
0.25  
1.25  
0.12  
0.65  
6.4  
31.7  
3.0  
16.5  
Appendix A  
Specifications A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BJ Cartridges  
BC-21e Color BJ Cartridge  
Print head  
Print head life  
BJ tanks  
64 nozzles for black  
24 nozzles for each color (cyan, magenta,  
yellow)  
Approximately 2,000 color pages at 30%  
coverage  
BCI-21 Color (cyan, yellow, magenta)  
BCI-21 Black  
Ink color  
Black, cyan, yellow, magenta  
BJ tank yield  
BCI-21 Color  
BCI-21 Black  
Approx. 100 pages at 7.5% coverage  
Approx. 225 pages at 5% coverage  
BC-20 Black BJ Cartridge  
Print head  
Ink color  
Cartridge yield  
128 nozzles  
Black  
Approx. 900 text pages at 5% coverage  
BC-22e Photo BJ Cartridge  
Print head  
64 nozzles for black  
24 nozzles for color  
Ink color  
Cartridge yield  
Black, cyan, magenta, yellow  
Approximately 50 pages at  
7.5% coverage for each color  
A-4 Specifications  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile  
Applicable line  
Public switched telephone network  
Compatibility  
G3  
Data compression system  
MH, MR, MMR (ECM-MMR)  
Modem type  
Fax modem  
Modem speed  
14400/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps  
Automatic fallback  
Transmission speed  
Approx. 6 seconds/page* at 14.4 Kbps, ECM-MMR  
transmitting from memory  
Transmission/reception memory  
672 KB DRAM, MR storage  
Up to 42 pages*  
Up to 20 documents*  
LCD displays memory used  
Uses direct transmission when memory full  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
30 pages, letter size (based on 20 lb paper)  
10 pages, legal size  
Fax resolution  
Fine mode—203 pels/in × 196 lines/in  
(8 pels/mm × 7.7 lines/mm)  
Standard mode—203 pels/in × 98 lines/in  
(8 pels/mm × 3.85 lines/mm)  
Fax printing speed  
Approx. 4 pages/minute*  
*Based on the CCITT #1 Chart, Standard mode  
Appendix A  
Specifications A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dialing  
Automatic dialing  
One-touch speed dialing (6 locations)  
Coded speed dialing (50 locations)  
Group dialing (55 locations)  
Manual dialing (with numeric buttons)  
Automatic redialing (including error redialing)  
Redial times: 1-10  
Redial interval: 2-99 min  
Manual redialing  
Pause button (variable length: 1-15 sec)  
Networking  
Sequential broadcast (up to 57 locations)  
Automatic receiving  
Non-ring reception  
Deactivate ECM  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection)  
Report/reference  
Activity report (up to 20 transactions)  
Non-delivery report  
TTI (Transmitter Terminal Identification)  
Ink saver  
Economy mode for printing received faxes extends  
cartridge life  
A-6 Specifications  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copier  
Scanning resolution  
B&W Text: 203 pels/in × 196 lines/in  
B&W Photo: 360 × 360 dpi with halftone  
Printing resolution  
360 × 360 dpi  
Default size  
100%  
Reduction sizes  
70%, 80%, 90%  
Copy speed  
Black and white copy  
Initial copy—45 seconds  
Subsequent copies—20 seconds  
Multiple copies  
Up to 99 copies of a document  
Scanner  
Scanning method  
Solid-state electronic scanning by contact image sensor  
Scanning image processing  
UHQ™ (Ultra High Quality image enhancement)  
Halftones—256 levels of gray  
Photo/text auto-recognition  
Appendix A  
Specifications A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic document feeder  
Paper size—Up to 30 letter-size or A4-size sheets  
10 legal size sheets  
(Based on 20 lb paper)  
Paper thickness  
Auto feed—0.003-0.005 in (0.08-0.13 mm)  
Manual feed—Up to 0.017 in (0.43 mm)  
Paper Weight  
Auto feed—20-24 lb (75-90 g/m2)  
Manual feed—24-90.7 lb (90-340 g/m2)  
Resolution  
Optical 300 dpi  
Enhanced 30-600 dpi (set from within application)  
Effective scanning width  
8.42 in (214 mm)  
Compatibility  
TWAIN  
Scanning speed  
B&W Text (40-150 dpi)—9 sec/page 5 ms/line  
B&W Text (160-300 dpi)—18 sec/page 5 ms/line  
B&W Text (310-600 dpi)—35 sec/page 5 ms/line  
Grayscale (40-150 dpi)—13 sec/page 7 ms/line  
Grayscale (160-300 dpi)—25 sec/page 7 ms/line  
Grayscale (310-600 dpi)—78 sec/page 11 ms/line  
Document sizes  
Maximum 8.5 in W × 39.3 in L (216 mm W × 1000 mm L)  
Minimum 3.5 in W × 2.5 in L (88.9 mm W × 63.5 mm L)  
A-8 Specifications  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanned image  
The actual scanned image size for the MultiPASS C3500 is shown below.  
This information applies to documents that will be scanned for faxing  
or copying.  
There is a 0.12 in (3.0 mm) margin on either side of the sheet and a  
0.16 in (4.0 mm) margin on the top and bottom that are not picked  
up by the scanner.  
MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows  
System Requirements  
®
IBM PC or compatible computer with a 486DX2 66 MHz or  
®
higher processor (Pentium recommended)  
16 MB of memory (32 MB recommended)  
50 MB of free hard disk space  
Microsoft Windows 98 or Windows 95  
Bi-directional Centronics-compatible parallel cable (IEEE 1284-compliant)  
CD ROM drive (2× or better)  
PC Fax  
Canon proprietary MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows  
Fax/Telephone address book  
Fax Viewer  
Fax Log  
Fax distribution lists  
Real-time MultiPASS C3500 hardware status available through computer  
Appendix A  
Specifications A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Specifications  
Power Source  
120V/60Hz  
Power Consumption  
Approx. 48W (Maximum)  
Approx. 8.4W (Standby)  
Dimension (W x D x H)  
15.75 in × 14.4 in × 7.75 in  
(400 mm × 365 mm × 205 mm)  
Main unit – no trays  
Weight  
12.3 lb (5.6 kg)  
Environmental Conditions  
Temperature: 50° F - 90.5° F (10° C - 32.5° C)  
Humidity: 20% to 85% RH  
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)  
16 × 1  
Display Languages  
English, French, Spanish  
Telephone  
Automatic Fax/Tel switchover  
Answering machine hook-up  
(CNG detecting signal, no sound)  
Telephone hook-up  
Remote reception by telephone  
Remote receiving ID (Default): 25  
Tone button  
Pause button (variable length: 1-15 sec)  
A-10 Specifications  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Space Requirements  
24.3 in (618 mm)  
14.4 in (365 mm)  
Appendix A  
Specifications A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Faxes and Phone Calls  
Automatically—Fax/Tel Mode  
In Fax/Tel mode, the MultiPASS monitors all incoming calls to see  
whether the call is from another fax machine or from a telephone:  
A-12 Specifications  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the MultiPASS C3500  
as a Stand-alone Fax  
B
If you plan to use the MultiPASS C3500 as a stand-alone fax, and you do  
not install the MultiPASS Desktop Manager, you must enter your name  
and fax number from the operator panel. If you choose to use the  
MultiPASS C3500 this way, you will not be able to use its many features,  
such as speed dialing, PC faxing, or scanning.  
Also, you will not be able to change the Transmit Confirmation Report  
to print after every transaction. (The default for the TX REPORT is to  
print only when there is an error in transmission.) Canon recommends  
that you install the MultiPASS software as described in the Quick Start  
Guide. See Chapter 3 for details on using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager.  
In the United States, you are required by FCC regulations to include your  
name and fax number every time you send a fax. Be sure to enter this  
information.  
N
LCD Menu System  
To enter the LCD Menu System, press the FUNCTION button on the  
operator panel. Then press < or > to move between selections and press  
START/COPY to make a selection. Press STOP to exit the LCD Menu  
System.  
Option  
Description/Settings  
USER SETTINGS  
DATE & TIME  
Set the date and time (24-hour clock) using the  
numeric buttons.  
UNIT TELEPHONE #  
UNIT NAME  
Enter your fax number using the numeric  
buttons (up to 20 characters).  
Enter the name you want to appear at the top of  
each fax page you send (up to 24 characters).  
TEL LINE TYPE  
Sets the dialing method the MultiPASS uses to  
match the type of phone line you have—  
TOUCH TONE or ROTARY/PULSE.  
Appendix B  
Using the MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Description/Settings  
RX MODE  
Sets the Receive Mode.  
FILE PRINT  
Prints documents stored in the MultiPASS’s  
memory (when the MultiPASS Desktop  
Manager is installed).  
ROLLER CLEANING  
HEAD CLEANING  
NOZZLE CHECK  
Cleans the rollers inside the MultiPASS.  
Cleans the print head on the BJ cartridge.  
Prints a test pattern to check whether the  
BJ cartridge is functioning normally.  
You can change the TX REPORT settings only through the MultiPASS  
Desktop Manager.  
N
Entering Information in the MultiPASS  
When using the MultiPASS as a stand-alone fax machine, you must enter  
your user information into the unit through the operator panel.  
When entering information through the operator panel of the  
MultiPASS, follow these guidelines.  
❍ If you pause and do not make an entry for more than 60 seconds,  
the MultiPASS returns to Standby mode. You must start the  
procedure over from the beginning.  
❍ If you make a mistake while entering registration information, you  
can correct it in one of two ways:  
Press < or > to move the cursor under the wrong character, and  
then enter the correct character.  
•
Press STOP and reenter the information.  
•
B-2 Using the MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax  
Appendix B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Your User Information  
Follow the steps below to set the date and time for your MultiPASS and  
to enter your fax number and your name. The date and time appear in  
the LCD display as well as on the documents you send. Your fax number  
and name appear on each document you send.  
Press FUNCTION  
FUNCTION  
on the one-touch  
speed dialing  
keypad.  
Then press  
the > button.  
USER SETTINGS  
Press  
START/COPY  
twice.  
DATE & TIME  
0 6 / 0 8 / 9 8  
1 5 :3 6  
❍ Use the month-day-year format (mm/dd/yy).  
❍ Precede single digits with a zero.  
Enter today’s  
date and the  
time using the  
numeric buttons.  
1 1 / 1 5 / 9 8  
0 0 :0 0  
Appendix B  
Using the MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❍ Set the time using the 24-hour clock system.  
❍ Example:  
07:30 = 7:30 A.M.  
17:05 = 5:05 P.M.  
1 1 / 1 5 / 9 8  
0 8 :1 5  
Press START/COPY  
twice when the  
date and time  
are entered.  
DATA ENTRY OK  
TEL =  
Enter your fax  
number (up to 20  
digits) using the  
numeric buttons.  
TEL = 6 6 6 5 5 5 2 2 2 2  
❍ You can enter a space with the > button to make your  
number easier to read.  
B-4 Using the MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax  
Appendix B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press START/COPY  
when the fax  
DATA ENTRY OK  
number is entered.  
❍ After a few seconds, the LCD display changes to:  
UNIT NAME  
Then press  
START/COPY  
again.  
❍ Press the button with the letter you want to enter; for  
Enter your name  
(up to 24  
example, press 2 three times to enter a capital C.  
characters) using  
the numeric  
buttons.  
CANON FAX BACK  
Button  
Characters  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
1
ABCabc2  
DEFdef3  
GHIghi4  
JKLjk15  
MNOmno6  
PQRSpqrs7  
TUVtuv8  
WXYZwxyz9  
0
-.*#!”,;:^’_=/|’?$@%&+()[]{}<>  
❍ Correct errors by moving the cursor to the error using  
< or > (on the one-touch speed dialing keypad) and  
entering the correct character.  
Appendix B  
Using the MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press START/COPY  
when you finish  
entering your  
name.  
DATA ENTRY OK  
Press STOP to  
complete the  
registration.  
The MultiPASS returns to standby  
mode.  
B-6 Using the MultiPASS C3500 as a Stand-alone Fax  
Appendix B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Box Modem SME 4M User Manual
BodyCraft Home Gym GALENA STRENGTH User Manual
Bosch Power Tools Saw 0601677039 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Portable Generator 40221 User Manual
Brother Fax Machine FAX 1560 User Manual
Bushnell Telescope 78 7325 User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Pressure Washer PW2575 User Manual
Casablanca Fan Company Fan HM 101 User Manual
Casio PDAs Smartphones PA 2400W User Manual
Chauvet Insect Control Equipment FX 800 User Manual